WO2018118118A1 - Apparatus, system and method of beamforming - Google Patents

Apparatus, system and method of beamforming Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018118118A1
WO2018118118A1 PCT/US2017/039927 US2017039927W WO2018118118A1 WO 2018118118 A1 WO2018118118 A1 WO 2018118118A1 US 2017039927 W US2017039927 W US 2017039927W WO 2018118118 A1 WO2018118118 A1 WO 2018118118A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
edmg sta
sta
trn
edmg
antenna
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2017/039927
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Artyom LOMAYEV
Alexander Maltsev
Jonathan KOSLOFF
Tom Harel
Claudio Da Silva
Carlos Cordeiro
Original Assignee
Intel IP Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Intel IP Corporation filed Critical Intel IP Corporation
Publication of WO2018118118A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018118118A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0491Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas using two or more sectors, i.e. sector diversity
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/08Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
    • H04B7/0868Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining
    • H04B7/088Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining using beam selection

Definitions

  • Embodiments described herein generally relate to beamforming.
  • a wireless communication network in a millimeter-wave band may provide high-speed data access for users of wireless communication devices.
  • a beamforming procedure may be configured to steer a first directional antenna of a first wireless communication device, e.g., a beamforming initiator (BI), and a second directional antenna of a second wireless communication device, e.g., a beamforming responder (BR).
  • the beamforming procedure may be performed, for example, to establish a high throughout communication link between the BI and the BR, e.g., at an acceptable communication range between the BR and the BI.
  • the beamforming procedure may include a Sector Level Sweep (SLS) procedure.
  • the beamforming procedure may include a Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) phase, e.g., following the SLS procedure.
  • BRP Beam Refinement Protocol
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic block diagram illustration of a system, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic illustration of a Training (TRN) unit, which may be implemented in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • TRN Training
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic illustration of a transmit (Tx) beamforming procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic illustration of an initiator Tx training procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic illustration of a responder Tx training procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic illustration of a responder Tx training procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic illustration of a responder receive (Rx) training procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic illustration of an initiator Rx training procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • Fig. 9 is a schematic flow-chart illustration of a method of beamforming, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • Fig. 10 is a schematic flow-chart illustration of a method of beamforming, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic illustration of a product of manufacture, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Discussions herein utilizing terms such as, for example, “processing”, “computing”, “calculating”, “determining”, “establishing”, “analyzing”, “checking”, or the like, may refer to operation(s) and/or process(es) of a computer, a computing platform, a computing system, or other electronic computing device, that manipulate and/or transform data represented as physical (e.g., electronic) quantities within the computer' s registers and/or memories into other data similarly represented as physical quantities within the computer's registers and/or memories or other information storage medium that may store instructions to perform operations and/or processes.
  • processing may refer to operation(s) and/or process(es) of a computer, a computing platform, a computing system, or other electronic computing device, that manipulate and/or transform data represented as physical (e.g., electronic) quantities within the computer' s registers and/or memories into other data similarly represented as physical quantities within the computer's registers and/or memories or other information storage medium that may store instructions to perform operations and/or processes.
  • plural and “a plurality”, as used herein, include, for example, “multiple” or “two or more”.
  • a plurality of items includes two or more items.
  • references to "one embodiment”, “an embodiment”, “demonstrative embodiment”, “various embodiments” etc. indicate that the embodiment(s) so described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but not every embodiment necessarily includes the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Further, repeated use of the phrase “in one embodiment” does not necessarily refer to the same embodiment, although it may.
  • Some embodiments may be used in conjunction with various devices and systems, for example, a User Equipment (UE), a Mobile Device (MD), a wireless station (STA), a Personal Computer (PC), a desktop computer, a mobile computer, a laptop computer, a notebook computer, a tablet computer, a server computer, a handheld computer, a handheld device, a wearable device, a sensor device, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) device, a handheld PDA device, an on-board device, an off -board device, a hybrid device, a vehicular device, a non- vehicular device, a mobile or portable device, a consumer device, a non-mobile or non-portable device, a wireless communication station, a wireless communication device, a wireless Access Point (AP), a wired or wireless router, a wired or wireless modem, a video device, an audio device, an audio-video (A/V) device, a wired or wireless network, a wireless area
  • Some embodiments may be used in conjunction with devices and/or networks operating in accordance with existing IEEE 802.11 standards (including IEEE 802.11-2016 ⁇ IEEE 802.11-2016, IEEE Standard for Information technology- Telecommunications and information exchange between systems Local and metropolitan area networks— Specific requirements Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications, December 7, 2016); and/or IEEE 802.11 ay (P802.11ay Standard for Information Technology- Telecommunications and Information Exchange Between Systems Local and Metropolitan Area Networks— Specific Requirements Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications— Amendment: Enhanced Throughput for Operation in License -Exempt Bands Above 45 GHz)) and/or future versions and/or derivatives thereof, devices and/or networks operating in accordance with existing WiFi Alliance (WFA) Peer-to-Peer (P2P) specifications (including WiFi P2P technical specification, version 1.5, August 4, 2015) and/or future versions and/or derivatives thereof, devices and
  • Some embodiments may be used in conjunction with one way and/or two- way radio communication systems, cellular radio-telephone communication systems, a mobile phone, a cellular telephone, a wireless telephone, a Personal Communication Systems (PCS) device, a PDA device which incorporates a wireless communication device, a mobile or portable Global Positioning System (GPS) device, a device which incorporates a GPS receiver or transceiver or chip, a device which incorporates an RFID element or chip, a Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) transceiver or device, a Single Input Multiple Output (SIMO) transceiver or device, a Multiple Input Single Output (MISO) transceiver or device, a device having one or more internal antennas and/or external antennas, Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) devices or systems, multi- standard radio devices or systems, a wired or wireless handheld device, e.g., a Smartphone, a Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) device, or the like.
  • WAP Wireless Application Protocol
  • Some embodiments may be used in conjunction with one or more types of wireless communication signals and/or systems, for example, Radio Frequency (RF), Infra Red (IR), Frequency-Division Multiplexing (FDM), Orthogonal FDM (OFDM), Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access (OFDM A), FDM Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM), Time-Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Multi-User MIMO (MU-MIMO), Spatial Division Multiple Access (SDMA), Extended TDMA (E- TDMA), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), extended GPRS, Code-Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Wideband CDMA (WCDMA), CDMA 2000, single- carrier CDMA, multi-carrier CDMA, Multi-Carrier Modulation (MDM), Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT), Bluetooth®, Global Positioning System (GPS), Wi-Fi, Wi-Max, ZigBeeTM, Ultra- Wideband (UWB), Global System for Mobile
  • wireless device includes, for example, a device capable of wireless communication, a communication device capable of wireless communication, a communication station capable of wireless communication, a portable or non-portable device capable of wireless communication, or the like.
  • a wireless device may be or may include a peripheral that is integrated with a computer, or a peripheral that is attached to a computer.
  • the term "wireless device” may optionally include a wireless service.
  • the term "communicating" as used herein with respect to a communication signal includes transmitting the communication signal and/or receiving the communication signal.
  • a communication unit which is capable of communicating a communication signal, may include a transmitter to transmit the communication signal to at least one other communication unit, and/or a communication receiver to receive the communication signal from at least one other communication unit.
  • the verb communicating may be used to refer to the action of transmitting or the action of receiving.
  • the phrase "communicating a signal” may refer to the action of transmitting the signal by a first device, and may not necessarily include the action of receiving the signal by a second device.
  • the phrase "communicating a signal” may refer to the action of receiving the signal by a first device, and may not necessarily include the action of transmitting the signal by a second device.
  • the communication signal may be transmitted and/or received, for example, in the form of Radio Frequency (RF) communication signals, and/or any other type of signal.
  • RF Radio Frequency
  • circuitry may refer to, be part of, or include, an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), an integrated circuit, an electronic circuit, a processor (shared, dedicated, or group), and/or memory (shared, dedicated, or group), that execute one or more software or firmware programs, a combinational logic circuit, and/or other suitable hardware components that provide the described functionality.
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • the circuitry may be implemented in, or functions associated with the circuitry may be implemented by, one or more software or firmware modules.
  • circuitry may include logic, at least partially operable in hardware.
  • logic may refer, for example, to computing logic embedded in circuitry of a computing apparatus and/or computing logic stored in a memory of a computing apparatus.
  • the logic may be accessible by a processor of the computing apparatus to execute the computing logic to perform computing functions and/or operations.
  • logic may be embedded in various types of memory and/or firmware, e.g., silicon blocks of various chips and/or processors.
  • Logic may be included in, and/or implemented as part of, various circuitry, e.g. radio circuitry, receiver circuitry, control circuitry, transmitter circuitry, transceiver circuitry, processor circuitry, and/or the like.
  • logic may be embedded in volatile memory and/or non-volatile memory, including random access memory, read only memory, programmable memory, magnetic memory, flash memory, persistent memory, and the like.
  • Logic may be executed by one or more processors using memory, e.g., registers, stuck, buffers, and/or the like, coupled to the one or more processors, e.g., as necessary to execute the logic.
  • Some demonstrative embodiments may be used in conjunction with a WLAN, e.g., a WiFi network.
  • Other embodiments may be used in conjunction with any other suitable wireless communication network, for example, a wireless area network, a "piconet", a WPAN, a WVAN and the like.
  • Some demonstrative embodiments may be used in conjunction with a wireless communication network communicating over a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz), e.g., 60GHz.
  • GHz gigahertz
  • other embodiments may be implemented utilizing any other suitable wireless communication frequency bands, for example, an Extremely High Frequency (EHF) band (the millimeter wave (mmWave) frequency band), e.g., a frequency band within the frequency band of between 20Ghz and 300GHz, a frequency band above 45GHz, a frequency band below 20GHz, e.g., a Sub 1 GHz (S1G) band, a 2.4GHz band, a 5GHz band, a WLAN frequency band, a WPAN frequency band, a frequency band according to the WGA specification, and the like.
  • EHF Extremely High Frequency
  • S1G Sub 1 GHz
  • WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
  • WPAN Wireless Personal Area Network
  • antenna may include any suitable configuration, structure and/or arrangement of one or more antenna elements, components, units, assemblies and/or arrays.
  • the antenna may implement transmit and receive functionalities using separate transmit and receive antenna elements.
  • the antenna may implement transmit and receive functionalities using common and/or integrated transmit/receive elements.
  • the antenna may include, for example, a phased array antenna, a single element antenna, a set of switched beam antennas, and/or the like.
  • DMG directional multi-gigabit
  • DBand directional band
  • DMG communications may involve one or more directional links to communicate at a rate of multiple gigabits per second, for example, at least 1 Gigabit per second, e.g., at least 7 Gigabit per second, at least 30 Gigabit per second, or any other rate.
  • DMG STA also referred to as a "mmWave STA (mSTA)"
  • mmWave STA mmWave STA
  • the DMG STA may perform other additional or alternative functionality.
  • Other embodiments may be implemented by any other apparatus, device and/or station.
  • FIG. 1 schematically illustrates a system 100, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • system 100 may include one or more wireless communication devices.
  • system 100 may include a wireless communication device 102, a wireless communication device 140, and/or one more other devices.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may include a mobile device or a non-mobile, e.g., a static, device.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may include, for example, a UE, an MD, a STA, an AP, a PC, a desktop computer, a mobile computer, a laptop computer, an UltrabookTM computer, a notebook computer, a tablet computer, a server computer, a handheld computer, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, a sensor device, a handheld device, a wearable device, a PDA device, a handheld PDA device, an on-board device, an off-board device, a hybrid device (e.g., combining cellular phone functionalities with PDA device functionalities), a consumer device, a vehicular device, a non-vehicular device, a mobile or portable device, a non-mobile or nonportable device, a mobile phone, a cellular telephone, a PCS device, a PDA device which incorporates a wireless communication device, a mobile or portable GPS device, a DVB device, a relatively small computing device, a non-desk
  • device 102 may include, for example, one or more of a processor 191, an input unit 192, an output unit 193, a memory unit 194, and/or a storage unit 195; and/or device 140 may include, for example, one or more of a processor 181, an input unit 182, an output unit 183, a memory unit 184, and/or a storage unit 185.
  • Devices 102 and/or 140 may optionally include other suitable hardware components and/or software components.
  • some or all of the components of one or more of devices 102 and/or 140 may be enclosed in a common housing or packaging, and may be interconnected or operably associated using one or more wired or wireless links. In other embodiments, components of one or more of devices 102 and/or 140 may be distributed among multiple or separate devices.
  • processor 191 and/or processor 181 may include, for example, a Central Processing Unit (CPU), a Digital Signal Processor (DSP), one or more processor cores, a single-core processor, a dual-core processor, a multiple-core processor, a microprocessor, a host processor, a controller, a plurality of processors or controllers, a chip, a microchip, one or more circuits, circuitry, a logic unit, an Integrated Circuit (IC), an Application-Specific IC (ASIC), or any other suitable multi-purpose or specific processor or controller.
  • Processor 191 may execute instructions, for example, of an Operating System (OS) of device 102 and/or of one or more suitable applications.
  • Processor 181 may execute instructions, for example, of an Operating System (OS) of device 140 and/or of one or more suitable applications.
  • OS Operating System
  • OS Operating System
  • input unit 192 and/or input unit 182 may include, for example, a keyboard, a keypad, a mouse, a touch-screen, a touch- pad, a track-ball, a stylus, a microphone, or other suitable pointing device or input device.
  • Output unit 193 and/or output unit 183 may include, for example, a monitor, a screen, a touch-screen, a flat panel display, a Light Emitting Diode (LED) display unit, a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) display unit, a plasma display unit, one or more audio speakers or earphones, or other suitable output devices.
  • LED Light Emitting Diode
  • LCD Liquid Crystal Display
  • memory unit 194 and/or memory unit 184 includes, for example, a Random Access Memory (RAM), a Read Only Memory (ROM), a Dynamic RAM (DRAM), a Synchronous DRAM (SD-RAM), a flash memory, a volatile memory, a non-volatile memory, a cache memory, a buffer, a short term memory unit, a long term memory unit, or other suitable memory units.
  • Storage unit 195 and/or storage unit 185 may include, for example, a hard disk drive, a floppy disk drive, a Compact Disk (CD) drive, a CD-ROM drive, a DVD drive, or other suitable removable or non-removable storage units.
  • Memory unit 194 and/or storage unit 195 may store data processed by device 102.
  • Memory unit 184 and/or storage unit 185 may store data processed by device 140.
  • wireless communication devices 102 and/or 140 may be capable of communicating content, data, information and/or signals via a wireless medium (WM) 103.
  • wireless medium 103 may include, for example, a radio channel, a cellular channel, an RF channel, a WiFi channel, an IR channel, a Bluetooth (BT) channel, a Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Channel, and the like.
  • WM 103 may include one or more directional bands and/or channels.
  • WM 103 may include one or more millimeter-wave (mmWave) wireless communication bands and/or channels.
  • mmWave millimeter-wave
  • WM 103 may include one or more DMG channels. In other embodiments WM 103 may include any other directional channels.
  • WM 103 may include any other type of channel over any other frequency band.
  • device 102 and/or device 140 may include one or more radios including circuitry and/or logic to perform wireless communication between devices 102, 140 and/or one or more other wireless communication devices.
  • device 102 may include at least one radio 114
  • device 140 may include at least one radio 144.
  • radio 114 and/or radio 144 may include one or more wireless receivers (Rx) including circuitry and/or logic to receive wireless communication signals, RF signals, frames, blocks, transmission streams, packets, messages, data items, and/or data.
  • Rx wireless receivers
  • radio 114 may include at least one receiver 116
  • radio 144 may include at least one receiver 146.
  • radio 114 and/or radio 144 may include one or more wireless transmitters (Tx) including circuitry and/or logic to transmit wireless communication signals, RF signals, frames, blocks, transmission streams, packets, messages, data items, and/or data.
  • Tx wireless transmitters
  • radio 114 may include at least one transmitter 118
  • radio 144 may include at least one transmitter 148.
  • radio 114 and/or radio 144, transmitters 118 and/or 148, and/or receivers 116 and/or 146 may include circuitry; logic; Radio Frequency (RF) elements, circuitry and/or logic; baseband elements, circuitry and/or logic; modulation elements, circuitry and/or logic; demodulation elements, circuitry and/or logic; amplifiers; analog to digital and/or digital to analog converters; filters; and/or the like.
  • radio 114 and/or radio 144 may include or may be implemented as part of a wireless Network Interface Card (NIC), and the like.
  • NIC wireless Network Interface Card
  • radios 114 and/or 144 may be configured to communicate over a directional band, for example, an mmWave band, and/or any other band, for example, a 2.4GHz band, a 5 GHz band, a S1G band, and/or any other band.
  • a directional band for example, an mmWave band, and/or any other band, for example, a 2.4GHz band, a 5 GHz band, a S1G band, and/or any other band.
  • radios 114 and/or 144 may include, or may be associated with one or more, e.g., a plurality of, directional antennas.
  • device 102 may include one or more, e.g., a plurality of, directional antennas 107, and/or device 140 may include on or more, e.g., a plurality of, directional antennas 147.
  • Antennas 107 and/or 147 may include any type of antennas suitable for transmitting and/or receiving wireless communication signals, blocks, frames, transmission streams, packets, messages and/or data.
  • antennas 107 and/or 147 may include any suitable configuration, structure and/or arrangement of one or more antenna elements, components, units, assemblies and/or arrays.
  • Antennas 107 and/or 147 may include, for example, antennas suitable for directional communication, e.g., using beamforming techniques.
  • antennas 107 and/or 147 may include a phased array antenna, a multiple element antenna, a set of switched beam antennas, and/or the like.
  • antennas 107 and/or 147 may implement transmit and receive functionalities using separate transmit and receive antenna elements.
  • antennas 107 and/or 147 may implement transmit and receive functionalities using common and/or integrated transmit/receive elements.
  • antennas 107 and/or 147 may include directional antennas, which may be steered to one or more beam directions.
  • antennas 107 may be steered to one or more beam directions 135, and/or antennas 147 may be steered to one or more beam directions 145.
  • antennas 107 and/or 147 may include and/or may be implemented as part of a single Phased Antenna Array (PA A).
  • PA A Phased Antenna Array
  • antennas 107 and/or 147 may be implemented as part of a plurality of PAAs, for example, as a plurality of physically independent PAAs.
  • a PAA may include, for example, a rectangular geometry, e.g., including an integer number, denoted M, of rows, and an integer number, denoted N, of columns.
  • M integer number
  • N integer number
  • any other types of antennas and/or antenna arrays may be used.
  • antennas 107 and/or antennas 147 may be connected to, and/or associated with, one or more Radio Frequency (RF) chains.
  • RF Radio Frequency
  • device 102 may include a controller 124
  • device 140 may include a controller 154.
  • Controller 124 may be configured to perform and/or to trigger, cause, instruct and/or control device 102 to perform, one or more communications, to generate and/or communicate one or more messages and/or transmissions, and/or to perform one or more functionalities, operations and/or procedures between devices 102, 140 and/or one or more other devices; and/or controller 154 may be configured to perform, and/or to trigger, cause, instruct and/or control device 140 to perform, one or more communications, to generate and/or communicate one or more messages and/or transmissions, and/or to perform one or more functionalities, operations and/or procedures between devices 102, 140 and/or one or more other devices, e.g., as described below.
  • controllers 124 and/or 154 may include, or may be implemented, partially or entirely, by circuitry and/or logic, e.g., one or more processors including circuitry and/or logic, memory circuitry and/or logic, Media- Access Control (MAC) circuitry and/or logic, Physical Layer (PHY) circuitry and/or logic, baseband (BB) circuitry and/or logic, a BB processor, a BB memory, Application Processor (AP) circuitry and/or logic, an AP processor, an AP memory, and/or any other circuitry and/or logic, configured to perform the functionality of controllers 124 and/or 154, respectively. Additionally or alternatively, one or more functionalities of controllers 124 and/or 154 may be implemented by logic, which may be executed by a machine and/or one or more processors, e.g., as described below.
  • controller 124 may include circuitry and/or logic, for example, one or more processors including circuitry and/or logic, to cause, trigger and/or control a wireless device, e.g., device 102, and/or a wireless station, e.g., a wireless STA implemented by device 102, to perform one or more operations, communications and/or functionalities, e.g., as described herein.
  • a wireless device e.g., device 102
  • a wireless station e.g., a wireless STA implemented by device 102
  • controller 154 may include circuitry and/or logic, for example, one or more processors including circuitry and/or logic, to cause, trigger and/or control a wireless device, e.g., device 140, and/or a wireless station, e.g., a wireless STA implemented by device 140, to perform one or more operations, communications and/or functionalities, e.g., as described herein.
  • a wireless device e.g., device 140
  • a wireless station e.g., a wireless STA implemented by device 140
  • device 102 may include a message processor 128 configured to generate, process and/or access one or messages communicated by device 102.
  • message processor 128 may be configured to generate one or more messages to be transmitted by device 102, and/or message processor 128 may be configured to access and/or to process one or more messages received by device 102, e.g., as described below.
  • device 140 may include a message processor 158 configured to generate, process and/or access one or messages communicated by device 140.
  • message processor 158 may be configured to generate one or more messages to be transmitted by device 140, and/or message processor 158 may be configured to access and/or to process one or more messages received by device 140, e.g., as described below.
  • message processors 128 and/or 158 may include, or may be implemented, partially or entirely, by circuitry and/or logic, e.g., one or more processors including circuitry and/or logic, memory circuitry and/or logic, MAC circuitry and/or logic, PHY circuitry and/or logic, BB circuitry and/or logic, a BB processor, a BB memory, AP circuitry and/or logic, an AP processor, an AP memory, and/or any other circuitry and/or logic, configured to perform the functionality of message processors 128 and/or 158, respectively. Additionally or alternatively, one or more functionalities of message processors 128 and/or 158 may be implemented by logic, which may be executed by a machine and/or one or more processors, e.g., as described below.
  • At least part of the functionality of message processor 128 may be implemented as part of radio 114, and/or at least part of the functionality of message processor 158 may be implemented as part of radio 144.
  • message processor 128 may be implemented as part of controller 124, and/or at least part of the functionality of message processor 158 may be implemented as part of controller 154.
  • the functionality of message processor 128 may be implemented as part of any other element of device 102, and/or the functionality of message processor 158 may be implemented as part of any other element of device 140.
  • at least part of the functionality of controller 124 and/or message processor 128 may be implemented by an integrated circuit, for example, a chip, e.g., a System on Chip (SoC).
  • SoC System on Chip
  • the chip or SoC may be configured to perform one or more functionalities of radio 114.
  • the chip or SoC may include one or more elements of controller 124, one or more elements of message processor 128, and/or one or more elements of radio 114.
  • controller 124, message processor 128, and radio 114 may be implemented as part of the chip or SoC.
  • controller 124, message processor 128 and/or radio 114 may be implemented by one or more additional or alternative elements of device 102.
  • controller 154 and/or message processor 158 may be implemented by an integrated circuit, for example, a chip, e.g., a SoC.
  • the chip or SoC may be configured to perform one or more functionalities of radio 144.
  • the chip or SoC may include one or more elements of controller 154, one or more elements of message processor 158, and/or one or more elements of radio 144.
  • controller 154, message processor 158, and radio 144 may be implemented as part of the chip or SoC.
  • controller 154, message processor 158 and/or radio 144 may be implemented by one or more additional or alternative elements of device 140.
  • device 102 and/or device 140 may include, operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, one or more STAs.
  • device 102 may include at least one STA
  • device 140 may include at least one STA.
  • device 102 and/or device 140 may include, operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, one or more DMG STAs.
  • device 102 may include, operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, at least one DMG STA
  • device 140 may include, operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, at least one DMG STA.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may include, operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, any other wireless device and/or station, e.g., a WLAN STA, a WiFi STA, and the like.
  • device 102 and/or device 140 may be configured operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, an access point (AP), e.g., a DMG AP, and/or a personal basic service set (PBSS) control point (PCP), e.g., a DMG PCP, for example, an AP/PCP STA, e.g., a DMG AP/PCP STA.
  • AP access point
  • PBSS personal basic service set
  • PCP personal basic service set
  • AP/PCP STA e.g., a DMG AP/PCP STA.
  • device 102 and/or device 140 may be configured to operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, a non-AP STA, e.g., a DMG non-AP STA, and/or a non-PCP STA, e.g., a DMG non-PCP STA, for example, a non-AP/PCP STA, e.g., a DMG non- AP/PCP STA.
  • a non-AP STA e.g., a DMG non-AP STA
  • a non-AP/PCP STA e.g., a DMG non- AP/PCP STA.
  • device 102 and/or device 140 may operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, any other additional or alternative device and/or station.
  • a station may include a logical entity that is a singly addressable instance of a medium access control (MAC) and physical layer (PHY) interface to the wireless medium (WM).
  • the STA may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
  • an AP may include an entity that contains a station (STA), e.g., one STA, and provides access to distribution services, via the wireless medium (WM) for associated STAs.
  • STA station
  • WM wireless medium
  • the AP may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
  • a personal basic service set (PBSS) control point may include an entity that contains a STA, e.g., one station (STA), and coordinates access to the wireless medium (WM) by STAs that are members of a PBSS.
  • STA station
  • WM wireless medium
  • the PCP may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
  • a PBSS may include a directional multi-gigabit (DMG) basic service set (BSS) that includes, for example, one PBSS control point (PCP).
  • DMG directional multi-gigabit
  • BSS basic service set
  • PCP PBSS control point
  • DS distribution system
  • a PCP/AP STA may include a station (STA) that is at least one of a PCP or an AP. The PCP/AP STA may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
  • a non-AP STA may include a STA that is not contained within an AP.
  • the non-AP STA may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
  • a non-PCP STA may include a STA that is not a PCP.
  • the non-PCP STA may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
  • a non PCP/AP STA may include a STA that is not a PCP and that is not an AP.
  • the non-PCP/ AP STA may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to communicate over a Next Generation 60 GHz (NG60) network, an Enhanced DMG (EDMG) network, and/or any other network.
  • NG60 Next Generation 60 GHz
  • EDMG Enhanced DMG
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may perform Multiple-Input- Multiple-Output (MIMO) communication, for example, for communicating over the NG60 and/or EDMG networks, e.g., over an NG60 or an EDMG frequency band.
  • MIMO Multiple-Input- Multiple-Output
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to operate in accordance with one or more Specifications, for example, including one or more IEEE 802.11 Specifications, e.g., an IEEE 802.11-2016 Specification, an IEEE 802.11 ay Specification, and/or any other specification and/or protocol.
  • IEEE 802.11 Specifications e.g., an IEEE 802.11-2016 Specification, an IEEE 802.11 ay Specification, and/or any other specification and/or protocol.
  • Some demonstrative embodiments may be implemented, for example, as part of a new standard in an mmWave band, e.g., a 60GHz frequency band or any other directional band, for example, as an evolution of an IEEE 802.11-2016 Specification and/or an IEEE 802.1 lad Specification.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured according to one or more standards, for example, in accordance with an IEEE 802.11 ay Standard, which may be, for example, configured to enhance the efficiency and/or performance of an IEEE 802.1 lad Specification, which may be configured to provide Wi-Fi connectivity in a 60 GHz band.
  • IEEE 802.11 ay Standard which may be, for example, configured to enhance the efficiency and/or performance of an IEEE 802.1 lad Specification, which may be configured to provide Wi-Fi connectivity in a 60 GHz band.
  • Some demonstrative embodiments may enable, for example, to significantly increase the data transmission rates defined in the IEEE 802.1 lad Specification, for example, from 7 Gigabit per second (Gbps), e.g., up to 30 Gbps, or to any other data rate, which may, for example, satisfy growing demand in network capacity for new coming applications.
  • Gbps Gigabit per second
  • Some demonstrative embodiments may be implemented, for example, to allow increasing a transmission data rate, for example, by applying MIMO and/or channel bonding techniques.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to communicate MIMO communications over the mmWave wireless communication band.
  • device 102 and/or device 140 may be configured to support one or more mechanisms and/or features, for example, channel bonding, Single User (SU) MIMO, and/or Multi-User (MU) MIMO, for example, in accordance with an IEEE 802.1 lay Standard and/or any other standard and/or protocol.
  • SU Single User
  • MU Multi-User
  • device 102 and/or device 140 may include, operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform the functionality of, one or more EDMG STAs.
  • device 102 may include, operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform the functionality of, at least one EDMG STA
  • device 140 may include, operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform the functionality of, at least one EDMG STA.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may implement a communication scheme, which may include Physical layer (PHY) and/or Media Access Control (MAC) layer schemes, for example, to support one or more applications, and/or increased transmission data rates, e.g., data rates of up to 30 Gbps, or any other data rate.
  • PHY Physical layer
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • the PHY and/or MAC layer schemes may be configured to support frequency channel bonding over a mmWave band, e.g., over a 60 GHz band, SU MIMO techniques, and/or MU MIMO techniques.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to implement one or more mechanisms, which may be configured to enable SU and/or MU communication of Downlink (DL) and/or Uplink frames (UL) using a MIMO scheme.
  • DL Downlink
  • UL Uplink frames
  • device 102 and/or device 140 may be configured to implement one or more MU communication mechanisms.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to implement one or more MU mechanisms, which may be configured to enable MU communication of DL frames using a MIMO scheme, for example, between a device, e.g., device 102, and a plurality of devices, e.g., including device 140 and/or one or more other devices.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to communicate over an NG60 network, an EDMG network, and/or any other network and/or any other frequency band.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to communicate DL MIMO transmissions and/or UL MIMO transmissions, for example, for communicating over the NG60 and/or EDMG networks.
  • Some wireless communication Specifications may be configured to support a SU system, in which a STA may transmit frames to a single STA at a time. Such Specifications may not be able, for example, to support a STA transmitting to multiple STAs simultaneously, for example, using a MU-MIMO scheme, e.g., a DL MU-MIMO, or any other MU scheme.
  • a MU-MIMO scheme e.g., a DL MU-MIMO, or any other MU scheme.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to communicate over a channel bandwidth, e.g., of at least 2.16GHz, in a frequency band above 45GHz.
  • a channel bandwidth e.g., of at least 2.16GHz
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to implement one or more mechanisms, which may, for example, enable to extend a single-channel BW scheme, e.g., a scheme in accordance with the IEEE 802.1 lad Specification or any other scheme, for higher data rates and/or increased capabilities, e.g., as described below.
  • a single-channel BW scheme e.g., a scheme in accordance with the IEEE 802.1 lad Specification or any other scheme, for higher data rates and/or increased capabilities, e.g., as described below.
  • the single-channel BW scheme may include communication over a 2.16 GHz channel (also referred to as a "single-channel” or a "DMG channel”).
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to implement one or more channel bonding mechanisms, which may, for example, support communication over a channel BW (also referred to as a "wide channel", an "EDMG channel", or a "bonded channel") including two or more channels, e.g., two or more 2.16 GHz channels, e.g., as described below .
  • the channel bonding mechanisms may include, for example, a mechanism and/or an operation whereby two or more channels, e.g., 2.16 GHz channels, can be combined, e.g., for a higher bandwidth of packet transmission, for example, to enable achieving higher data rates, e.g., when compared to transmissions over a single channel.
  • channels e.g., 2.16 GHz channels
  • Some demonstrative embodiments are described herein with respect to communication over a channel BW including two or more 2.16 GHz channels, however other embodiments may be implemented with respect to communications over a channel bandwidth, e.g., a "wide" channel, including or formed by any other number of two or more channels, for example, an aggregated channel including an aggregation of two or more channels.
  • device 102 and/or device 140 may be configured to implement one or more channel bonding mechanisms, which may, for example, support an increased channel bandwidth, for example, a channel BW of 4.32 GHz, a channel BW of 6.48 GHz, a channel BW of 8.64 GHz, and/or any other additional or alternative channel BW, e.g., as described below.
  • channel bonding mechanisms may, for example, support an increased channel bandwidth, for example, a channel BW of 4.32 GHz, a channel BW of 6.48 GHz, a channel BW of 8.64 GHz, and/or any other additional or alternative channel BW, e.g., as described below.
  • a distinctive feature of wireless systems operating in a directional frequency band is a beamforming mechanism, e.g., a directional transmission and/or reception, which may be implemented, for example, to offset a large free-space path loss of millimeter- wave transmissions, e.g., according to the Friis transmission Law.
  • beamforming training mechanisms may be used by a pair of stations to determine appropriate antenna settings, e.g., for transmission and/or reception.
  • a beamforming training procedure may include, for example, a sector-level sweep (SLS), which may be mandatory, during which transmit beamforming training, e.g., coarse training, may be performed.
  • the beamforming training procedure e.g., in compliance with the IEEE 802.1 lad Specification, may include a Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) phase, e.g., after the SLS, which may be optional, and which may enable to perform receive beamforming training, and/or an iterative refinement of antenna weight vectors (AWVs), e.g., of a transmitter and/or receiver at one or both stations.
  • BRP Beam Refinement Protocol
  • AAVs antenna weight vectors
  • the SLS may include a "packetized" beamforming, for example, in which an entire packet may be transmitted, e.g., with a given TX/RX Antenna Weight Vector (AWV) settings.
  • AAV Antenna Weight Vector
  • the SLS may operate with a discrete set of AWVs including a codebook and covering a spatial sector, e.g., a subspace, of a particular interest.
  • the BRP may include an "in-packet" training, for example, in which an AWV switching may be performed, for example, during a same, e.g., single, packet transmission.
  • the AWV switching may be performed, for example, during a packet postamble transmission, which may include training (TRN) subfields grouped into TRN units.
  • TRN training subfields grouped into TRN units.
  • the BRP protocol may use arbitrary AWVs, for example, while not being limited to the given set of AWVs defined by the codebook design.
  • a limitation on the BRP e.g., the only limitation, may be based on a phase discretization accuracy of the AWV.
  • a beamforming training procedure may assume that an SLS training phase is performed first to acquire an initial, e.g., coarse, TX/RX AWV settings defined in the codebook, and the BRP may be performed based on the results of the SLS phase, for example, to refine the initial AWV settings.
  • an initial e.g., coarse, TX/RX AWV settings defined in the codebook
  • the BRP may be performed based on the results of the SLS phase, for example, to refine the initial AWV settings.
  • One technical disadvantage of the SLS training e.g., in compliance with an IEEE 802.11 ad Specification, is a significant time overhead caused by an entire packet transmission allocated for a given AWV setting.
  • a transmission may be performed by a station (STA), e.g., device 102 and/or device 140, which may be, for example, equipped with multiple antennas and/or Phased Antenna Arrays (PAAs).
  • STA station
  • PAAs Phased Antenna Arrays
  • a PAA e.g., even each PAA, may be equipped with multiple Sub Arrays (SAs) (also referred to as "sectors” or "antenna sectors”), which may, for example, operate successively or concurrently in time.
  • SAs Sub Arrays
  • antennas 107 and/or 147 may include multiple antennas and/or PAAs.
  • a PAA of the PAAs e.g., each PAA, may include a plurality of SAs, which may operate successively or concurrently in time.
  • application of the "packetized" SLS protocol with a multi antenna STA or multi SAs STA may cause a technical problem, for example, in the form of a significant time overhead.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of a beamforming procedure, which may allow, for example, to at least provide a technical solution for SLS, and/or one or more additional or alternative benefits, e.g., as described below.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of an SLS beamforming procedure, which may allow, for example, to significantly reduce a time overhead of the SLS beamforming procedure, e.g., as described below.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of a fast SLS beamforming protocol, e.g., as described below.
  • Some demonstrative embodiments described herein may refer to some operations as a "fast SLS beamforming protocol". However, this terminology is not limiting, and, in other embodiments, some or all of the operations described herein may be performed as part of any additional or alternative procedure or protocol.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of one or more additional or alternative procedures and/or protocols, e.g., to implement some or all of the operations described herein, and/or to implement additional, and/or alternative operations and/or procedures.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of a beamforming training protocol (also referred to as "SLS-over-TRN" or “SLS-over-BRP” beamforming training), which may be, for example, based on an "in-packet” training protocol, which may be suitable for STAs with multi antennas and/or multi SAs, e.g., as described below.
  • a beamforming training protocol also referred to as "SLS-over-TRN" or "SLS-over-BRP” beamforming training
  • in-packet which may be suitable for STAs with multi antennas and/or multi SAs, e.g., as described below.
  • the "SLS-over-TRN" beamforming training may utilize one or more TRN units to perform an SLS, for example, similar to a BRP, for example, while, in one non-limiting example, the "SLS-over-TRN" and/or "SLS-over-BRP" beamforming training may still be limited to an AWV set defined by the codebook.
  • the beamforming protocol may be configured to use a TRN unit structure, e.g., in compliance with a BRP frame structure, e.g., as described below.
  • any other TRN unit structure and/or frame structure may be used.
  • the beamforming protocol may redefine a behavior of a transmitter side and/or a receiver side during communication of one or more, for example, some or all, subfields of a packet, e.g., as described below.
  • the beamforming protocol may be configured to allow PAA switching and/or SA switching, for example, even inside a packet, e.g., during communication of one or more fields of the packet, for example, while allowing to meet one or more practical requirements for given time values, e.g., as described below.
  • the beamforming protocol may be implemented for SISO beamforming training, MIMO beamforming training, and/or SISO and/or MIMO beamforming training, for example, with any suitable channel bonding factor, e.g., as described before.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations in accordance with a beamforming training protocol or procedure, which may be configured, for example, to use a TRN structure, for example, a BRP TRN structure, to perform SLS beamforming "in- packet" training, e.g., as described below.
  • a functionality of one or more, e.g., some or all, training fields of a BRP packet may be configured, e.g., redefined, for example, at least to support switching of antennas and/or subarrays, for example, which may not be supported by an IEEE 802. Had Specification, e.g., as described below.
  • the beamforming protocol may implement one or more operations, for example, based on the BRP concept described above, for example, for "in-packet” training, e.g., rather than "packetized” BF, for example, during an SLS, as described below.
  • one or more operations of the beamforming protocol described herein may provide one or more technical advantages, for example, by allowing a very efficient BF flow, for example, at least in terms of time consumption and/or any other parameter, which may be important or critical, in some cases, for example, for STAs equipped with multiple antennas and/or subarrays, e.g., devices 102 and/or 140.
  • one or more operations of the beamforming protocol described herein may provide one or more technical advantages, for example, by exploiting a TRN structure for BRP, e.g., as described below.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to generate, process and/or communicate one or more TRN units, e.g., TRN Transmit (TRN-T) and/or TRN-Receive (TRN-R) units (TRN-T/R Units), for example, as part of one or more communications of a beamforming procedure, e.g., as described below.
  • TRN-T TRN Transmit
  • TRN-R TRN-Receive units
  • a packet structure for example, in compliance with a BRP packet structure or any other packet structure, may include one or more TRN units.
  • the packet structure may comply with a BRP packet postamble structure, or any other packet structure, which may include a plurality of, e.g., a number of, TRN units.
  • a TRN unit e.g., each TRN unit, may be defined as a group of N TRN subfields.
  • a TRN subfield e.g., each TRN subfield, may train an AWV, e.g., a single AWV, of an antenna.
  • a TRN unit may be implemented as a TRN transmit (TRN-T) unit, which may be applied for transmit training, or as a TRN receive (TRN-R) unit, which may be applied for receive training, e.g., as described below.
  • TRN-T TRN transmit
  • TRN-R TRN receive
  • the TRN-T/R units may be configured to have an identical sequence definition.
  • Fig. 2 schematically illustrates a TRN unit 200, which may be implemented in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • device 102 (Fig. 1) and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may be configured to generate, transmit, receive and/or process one or more frames, packets and/or transmissions, for example, one or more Physical Layer Protocol Data Units (PPDUs), e.g., EDMG PPDUs, for example, including one or more BRP packets, e.g., EDMG packets, which may include one or more TRN units 200, for example, during a beamforming training procedure, e.g., as described below.
  • PPDUs Physical Layer Protocol Data Units
  • BRP packets e.g., EDMG packets
  • TRN units 200 e.g., a beamforming training procedure
  • TRN unit 200 may include a plurality of TRN subfields 217.
  • a TRN subfield 217 e.g., a single TRN subfield, of TRN unit 200 may be defined using 6 Golay complementary sequences 214, e.g., including Ga1 ⁇ 2 and/or Gb ⁇ Golay complementary sequences.
  • TRN subfield 213 may include any other number and/or type of sequences.
  • a sequence length, denoted N, of a Golay complementary sequence 214 may depend on one or more parameters, e.g., including a channel boding factor, denoted NCB, and/or any other additional or alternative parameter.
  • a station may be allowed to switch an AWV of an antenna, for example, during a time period of a first half of a Ga1 ⁇ 2 sequence 215, e.g., 36.3636 nanoseconds (ns). Accordingly, the AWV may be required to be stabilized during this time period.
  • different AWVs of the antenna may be trained, for example, for different TRN subfields in the TRN unit 200.
  • a first AWV of the antenna may be trained during a TRN subfield 212
  • a second AWV of the antenna may be trained during a TRN subfield 213
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to utilize TRN units, e.g., TRN unit 200 (Fig. 2), according to a definition of the TRN Units, which may be configured, and/or redefined, for example, to support an SLS-over-TRN beamforming procedure, e.g., as described below.
  • TRN unit 200 Fig. 2
  • a definition of the TRN Units which may be configured, and/or redefined, for example, to support an SLS-over-TRN beamforming procedure, e.g., as described below.
  • a TRN unit structure e.g., TRN Unit 200 (Fig. 2)
  • a TRN subfield structure e.g., TRN subfield 217 (Fig. 2)
  • a TX/RX behavior may be changed during transmission of one or more, e.g., some or all, fields of TRN unit 200 (Fig. 2), for example, to allow a PAA and/or a SA switching, e.g., as described below.
  • one or more time intervals may be configured to allow switching a PAA and/or a SA, for example, with respect to a practical system evaluation, e.g., as follows:
  • Antenna Switching Time 3 microseconds (us), e.g.,. between switching from a first antenna, e.g., a first PAA, to a second antenna, e.g., a second PAA; and/or
  • Sub Array Switching Time (SST): 0.5 us, e.g., for switching between a first SA and a second SA, e.g., of a same PAA.
  • a single TRN subfield e.g., TRN subfield 217 (Fig. 2), may have 6*128 chips (samples), which may result in a duration of 0.436us, or any other duration.
  • a particular choice of one or more intervals to switch an antenna may be determined, for example, to be less than or equal to the duration of a single TRN unit, for example, a duration of TRN unit 200 (Fig. 2), e.g., as described below.
  • the intervals to switch an antenna may ne configured to have a longer time, e.g., longer than a duration of one TRN unit.
  • a particular choice of one or more intervals to switch a SA may be determined to be less than or equal to two TRN subfields, for example, a duration of TRN subfields 212 and 213 (Fig. 2).
  • the intervals to switch an SA may ne configured to have any other duration, e.g., longer than a duration of two TRN subfields.
  • any other first number, denoted Nl, of TRN units may be allocated to switch an antenna, e.g., a PAA; and/or any other second number, denoted N2, of TRN subfields may be allocated to switch a SA.
  • switching of a PAA may be allowed, for example, only once per a TRN field of a BRP frame, or with a periodicity of some period in time, denoted PI, for example, multiple times over the BRP frame, e.g., as described below.
  • switching of the PAA may be allowed according to any other additional or alternative criteria.
  • switching of an SA may be allowed per each TRN unit, e.g., TRN unit 200 (Fig. 2), or per group of TRN units, e.g., with a periodicity of some period in time, denoted P2, e.g., as described below.
  • switching of the SA may be allowed according to any other additional or alternative criteria.
  • a transmitted signal e.g., during one or more of the transition time intervals defined above, may not be meaningful for Tx and/or Rx, and/or may not be used for signal estimations.
  • the transmitted signal e.g., during one or more of the transition time intervals defined above, may be used for one or more purposes.
  • signaling of a changed functionality for transition intervals may be supported, for example, in a header of a frame, for example, an EDMG-Header-A of an EDMG PPDU, and/or any other field or subfield of the frame.
  • a value for example, 1 bit or any other number of bits, may be defined, for example, in a header or any other field of a BRP PPDU, to indicate that a BRP part of the PPDU is to include TRN units and/or TRN subfields with redefined functionality, e.g., as described herein.
  • more than 1 bit may be allocated, for example, to several configurations with redefined functionality.
  • a first value may be configured to indicate a first configuration and/or functionality to be applied to one or more TRN units and/or subfields
  • a second value may be configured to indicate a second, different, configuration and/or functionality to be applied to one or more TRN units and/or subfields.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform beamforming training, for example, according to one or more operations of, e.g., by implementing some or all of the operations of, an SLS-over- TRN Beamforming Flow, e.g., as described below.
  • the SLS-over-TRN (SLS-over-BRP) beamforming may be configured to support a transmit sector sweep (TxSS) protocol, e.g., to train a Transmit (Tx) AWV; and/or a receive sector sweep (RxSS) protocol, e.g., to train a receive (RX) AWV, e.g., as described below.
  • TxSS transmit sector sweep
  • RxSS receive sector sweep
  • the SLS-over-TRN (SLS-over-BRP) beamforming may allow training between a pair of STAs, e.g., including a STA, e.g., device 102, performing a role of an initiator, and/or a STA, e.g., device 140, performing a role of a responder STA.
  • a STA e.g., device 102
  • a STA e.g., device 140
  • the initiator may start the training by sending a training request
  • the responder may reply to the training request.
  • the SLS-over-TRN (SLS-over-BRP) beamforming may be initiated, for example, by sending a GRANT frame by the initiator, and receiving a GRANT ACK frame by the responder, e.g., as described below. In other embodiments, this stage may be skipped if desired.
  • the SLS-over-TRN flow may be initiated in any other manner and/or using any other additional or alternative communications.
  • an SLS e.g., the SLS-over-TRN
  • ITI Initiator Training Interval
  • RTI Responder Training Interval
  • the ITI and RTI may be used, for example, as counterparts of an Initiator Sector Sweep (ISS) phase and/or a Responder Sector Sweep (RSS) phase of an SLS.
  • ISS Initiator Sector Sweep
  • RSS Responder Sector Sweep
  • first and a second EDMG STAs may be configured to perform a beamforming Training Interval (TI), e.g., as part of an SLS-over-TRN (SLS-over-BRP) beamforming procedure, e.g., as described below.
  • TI beamforming Training Interval
  • SLS-over-BRP SLS-over-TRN
  • the TI may include a TxSS sub-phase, an RxSS sub-phase, e.g., following the TxSS sub-phase, e.g., as described below.
  • the first and a second EDMG STAs may be configured to perform the TxSS sub-phase of TI, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may include a beamforming initiator and the second EDMG STA may include a beamforming responder, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of an initiator TI, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may include a beamforming responder and the second EDMG STA may include a beamforming initiator, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of a responder TI, e.g., as described below.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the beamforming initiator, and/or controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the beamforming responder.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the first EDMG STA, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of an initiator TI.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the second EDMG STA, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of a responder TI.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the second EDMG STA, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of an initiator TI.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the first EDMG STA, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of a responder TI.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit to the second EDMG STA a plurality of BRP packets, which may be configured, for example, to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 GHz, e.g., as described below.
  • the transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets may include a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of the BRP packet, e.g., as described below.
  • the transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets may include transmission of a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to transmit the preamble and the data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via the same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the plurality BRP packets from the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, for example, by receiving, e.g.,, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, the preamble and the data field of the BRP packet, for example, via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the second EDMG STA, and/or by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA at an omnidirectional ("omni") configuration, for example, to receive one or more TRN subfields in the TRN field of the BRP packet, e.g., as described below.
  • omni omnidirectional
  • the second EDMG STA may be configured to receive the plurality of BRP packets over the channel bandwidth in the frequency band above 45 GHz, e.g., as described below.
  • the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, for example, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA, transmit a feedback to the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the feedback to the first EDMG STA may indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the second EDMG STA may be configured to determine the selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the second EDMG STA, for example, based on the TRN units of the BRP packets of TxSS sub-phase.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, for example, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receive the feedback from the second EDMG STA.
  • the feedback from the second EDMG STA may indicate the selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, repeat the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, for example, based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, repeat the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA, for example, based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the plurality of BRP packets may include a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame- Space (IFS), e.g., as described below.
  • IFS Inter-Frame- Space
  • the feedback may be separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS, e.g., as described below.
  • repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI may be separated from one another by a third IFS, e.g., as described below.
  • any other additional or alternative IFSs may be utilized.
  • the TRN subfields of the TRN field in the BRP packet may correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the first EDMG STA may include TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field, e.g., as described below.
  • the at least one first TRN unit in the TRN filed may include a single TRN unit, e.g., as described below.
  • the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the first EDMG STA may include TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • the TxSS of the antenna may begin only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field of the BRP packet, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to begin the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to switch to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit, e.g., as describe below.
  • the second EDMG STA may be configured to switch to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the second EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to switch between a plurality of AWVs of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to switch between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to , during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, perform a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets, e.g., as described below.
  • the second EDMG STA may transmit a feedback to the first EDMG STA, for example, during each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase, e.g., as described below.
  • the second EDMG STA may be configured to transmit the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the second EDMG STA, for example, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to receive the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, for example, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
  • Rx Receive
  • the first and the second EDMG STAs may be configured to perform a receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
  • RxSS receive Sector Sweep
  • the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit a plurality of BRP packets from the second EDMG STA to the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the second EDMG STA may be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the second EDMG STA may be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over the TRN field of the BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets from the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, repeat the RxSS, for example, based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the acknowledgement from the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, switch between a plurality of AWVs of the Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets from the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI may be repeated, e.g., based on the count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, for example, to enable training of all RX antennas of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, for example, based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, for example, based on the count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
  • the beamforming TI may include an Initiator TI (ITI).
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • the first EDMG STA may include an initiator STA
  • the second EDMG STA may include a responder STA.
  • one or more of the operations e.g., all operations, described above with respect to the first EDMG STA
  • the operations may be performed by the initiator STA
  • one or more of the operations e.g., all operations, described above with respect to the second EDMG STA
  • the responder STA for example, when the beamforming TI includes the ITI.
  • the beamforming TI may include a responder TI (RTI).
  • the first EDMG STA may include the responder STA
  • the second EDMG STA may include the initiator STA.
  • one or more of the operations e.g., all operations, described above with respect to the first EDMG STA
  • the operations e.g., all operations, described above with respect to the second EDMG STA
  • the initiator STA for example, when the beamforming TI includes the RTI.
  • device 102 may include, perform one or more operations of, and/or perform the functionality of the initiator STA, e.g., during an ITI or an RTI.
  • device 140 may include, perform one or more operations of, and/or perform the functionality of the responder STA, e.g., during an ITI or an RTI.
  • devices 102 and 140 may be configured to perform an SLS-OVER-TRN, e.g., including a TxSS and/or an RxSS sub phase of the beamforming TI.
  • the SLS-OVER-TRN may include an ITI, for example, to train Tx or Rx AWVs of the initiator STA, e.g., device 102.
  • the SLS-OVER-TRN may include an RTI, to train Tx or RX AWVs of the responder STA, e.g., device 140.
  • the SLS over TRN may include a TxSS sub phase including an ITI and an RTI, e.g., as described below.
  • Fig. 3 schematically illustrates a Tx beamforming procedure 300, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • one or more operations of the beamforming procedure of Fig. 3 may be implemented, e.g., by devices 102 and/or 140, for example, to perform an SLS-over-TRN beamforming flow, e.g., a TxSS sub- phase of the beamforming TI.
  • beamforming procedure 300 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 300 having N antennas and a responder 340 having M antennas.
  • device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 302
  • device 140 Fig. 1 may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 340.
  • antennas 107 may include N antennas
  • antennas 147 may include M antennas.
  • the initiator 302 and/or responder 340 may be aware of each other capabilities, for example, based on one or more communication, for example, during a preceding phase of capabilities exchange, for example, during GRANT and GRANT ACK phase, and/or any other phase.
  • initiator 302 may perform a repetition of M sub-phases 312, for example, during an ITI interval 310, which may be equal to a total number of M antennas of responder 340.
  • ITI interval 310 for example, initiator 302 may perform training of its AWVs, and may receive feedbacks from responder 340 on the best sectors of initiator 302, e.g., for TxSS.
  • responder 340 may perform a repetition of N sub-phases 332 during an RTI interval 330, which may be equal to the total number of antennas N of initiator 302.
  • responder 340 may perform training of its AWVs, and may receive feedbacks from initiator 302 on the best sectors, e.g., for TxSS.
  • a first Inter-frame space (IFS), denoted IFSl, between two subsequent sub-phases 332 and/or between two subsequent sub- phases 312 t may be defined, for example, as any eligible IFS.
  • IFSl Inter-frame space
  • a second IFS between ITI interval 310 and RTI interval 330 may be defined, for example, as any eligible IFS.
  • the IFSl and/or IFS2 may be defined, for example, to include a Short Beamforming IFS (SBIFS), a Medium Beamforming IFS (MBIFS), a BRP IFS (BRPIFS), and/or any other IFS.
  • SBIFS Short Beamforming IFS
  • MIFS Medium Beamforming IFS
  • BRPIFS BRP IFS
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations and/or communications of beamforming procedure 300, e.g., as described below.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to repeat an ITI sub-phase 312 of beamforming procedure 300, for example, based on a count of the M antennas of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described below.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to repeat an RTI sub-phase 332 of beamforming procedure 300, for example, based on a count of the N antennas of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described below.
  • repetitions of RTI sub-phases 332 and/or repetitions of TTI sub-phases 312 of beamforming procedure 300 may be separated from one another by a first IFS, e.g., IFS1.
  • ITI interval 310 and RTI interval 330 of beamforming procedure 300 may be separated from one another by a second IFS, e.g., IFS2.
  • the SLS-over- TRN may implement a frame format, for example, a BRP frame format, e.g., in compliance with a future IEEE 802.1 lay Specification, and/or any other format.
  • a frame format for example, a BRP frame format, e.g., in compliance with a future IEEE 802.1 lay Specification, and/or any other format.
  • the BRP frame format may include, for example, a Preamble part , denoted P), a physical layer Service Data Unit (PSDU) part including MAC data, e.g., a data field, and/or a TRN field including one or more TRN units.
  • P Preamble part
  • PSDU physical layer Service Data Unit
  • the preamble P of an EDMG BRP PPDU may include, for example, one or more fields of a non-EDMG portion of an EDMG PPDU and/or one or more fields of an EDMG portion of the EMDG PPDU.
  • the non-EDMG portion may include a non-EDMG (legacy) Short Training Field (STF) (L-STF), a non-EDMG (Legacy) Channel Estimation Field (CEF) (L-CEF), and/or a non-EDMG header (L-header).
  • the EDMG portion of the EDMG PPDU may include one or more EDMG preamble fields, a data field, and a TRN field.
  • the one or more EDMG preamble fields may include, for example, one or more of a first EDMG header, e.g., an EDMG-Header-A, an EDMG-STF, an EDMG-CEF, and/or a second EDMG header, e.g., an EDMG- Header-B.
  • a first EDMG header e.g., an EDMG-Header-A
  • an EDMG-STF e.g., an EDMG-STF
  • an EDMG-CEF e.g., an EDMG- Header-B.
  • the preamble P of an EDMG BRP PPDU may include, for example, at least the non-EDMG portion, and the EDMG-Header-A.
  • the preamble P may include any other additional or alternative fields.
  • the BRP frame may include only some of these parts, may include additional or alternative parts, and/or may be transmitted according to any other channel bonding factor, and/or in any other form.
  • the SLS-over-TRN may implement one or more BRP frame format types, e.g., as described below.
  • the SLS-over-TRN may include a first frame format, in which the preamble P and the PSDU may be transmitted in a duplicate mode, and there may be no TRN field appended at an end of the BRP frame.
  • the SLS-over-TRN may implement a second frame format, in which a legacy part (non-EDMG) of the preamble part P may be transmitted in a duplicate mode, an EDMG part of the preamble P and the PSDU may be transmitted in a bonded mode over a bonded channel, and there may be no TRN field appended at the end of the frame.
  • a legacy part non-EDMG
  • the PSDU may be transmitted in a bonded mode over a bonded channel, and there may be no TRN field appended at the end of the frame.
  • the SLS-over-TRN may implement a third frame format, in which the preamble part P and the PSDU may be transmitted in a duplicate mode, and the TRN field may be transmitted in a bonded mode over a bonded channel.
  • the SLS-over-TRN may implement a fourth frame format, in which a legacy (n on-EDMG) part of the preamble part P may be transmitted in the duplicate mode, and an EDMG part of the preamble part P, the PSDU, and the TRN field may be transmitted in a bonded mode over a bonded channel.
  • a legacy (n on-EDMG) part of the preamble part P may be transmitted in the duplicate mode
  • an EDMG part of the preamble part P, the PSDU, and the TRN field may be transmitted in a bonded mode over a bonded channel.
  • the SLS-over-TRN may implement a fifth frame format, in which the preamble part P, the PSDU, and the TRN field may be transmitted in the duplicate mode.
  • one or more packets of a packet type having a TRN field, e.g., including TRN units, at the end, e.g., according to the third, fourth, and/or fifth frame formats, may be used, for example, for SLS training, e.g., as described below.
  • one or more packets of a packet type without TRN units appended at the end may be used, for example, for feedback and/or ACK purposes, e.g., as descried below.
  • the packets including the TRN units at the end may be used for SLS training purposes.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations and/or communications during an initiator training interval (ITI) of a TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
  • ITI initiator training interval
  • FIG. 4 schematically illustrates an initiator training procedure 400, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • initiator training procedure 400 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 402 having N antennas and a responder 440 having M antennas.
  • device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 402, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 440.
  • antennas 107 (Fig. 1) may include N antennas
  • antennas 147 (Fig. 1) may include M antennas.
  • one or more operations of the Fig. 4 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140, for example, as part of a TxSS-over-TRN training, e.g., with no antenna reciprocity.
  • one or more operations of Fig. 4 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, during an m th sub-phase 312 (Fig. 3) of ITI interval 310 (Fig. 3).
  • Fig. 4 may be repeated, for example, for M times according to the number M of responder antennas.
  • initiator 402 may send N BRP packets 415, e.g., wherein ⁇ may be equal to a number of antennas of initiator 402.
  • a BRP frame 415 may include, for example, a preamble part 417, denoted P, a data field 419, e.g., a PSDU, and/or a TRN field 421.
  • TRN field 421 may include a plurality of TRN units including a first TRN unit 423, followed by a plurality of TRN units 425.
  • a TRN unit 425 may include a plurality of TRN subfields 427.
  • the preamble P 417 and/or PSDU 419 may be transmitted and received using antenna settings, which may be, for example, gathered during a previous training of an antenna of initiator 402, or based on any other procedure and/or information.
  • the first TRN unit 423 may be used for antenna switching and may be defined as a transition interval.
  • one or more, e.g., all, of the rest of the TRN units 425 may be transmitted using different AWVs, e.g., by performing a sector sweep.
  • initiator training procedure 400 may allow, for example, SA switching from one TRN unit to another, e.g., by applying the mechanism defined above.
  • responder 440 may receive the TRN units of BRP packet 415, for example, while operating in an omnidirectional ("Omni)" mode 433 for an m" 1 antenna of responder 440.
  • responder 440 may select the best sector per PAA and/or SA of initiator 402, for example, based on one or more measurements corresponding to the TRN units of the BRP packet 415 received by the m th antenna of responder 440.
  • a feedback frame 424 may be sent by responder 440, for example, to deliver feedbacks on the best sectors for PAA and/or SA of initiator 402 for the m th antenna of responder 440.
  • responder 440 may use antenna settings gathered in a previous training to transmit feedback frame 424 and/or to receive the preamble part 417 and/or PSDU 419 of the BRP packets 415.
  • responder 440 may acknowledge the reception of BRP packets 415, e.g., in feedback frame 424.
  • a first IFS may separate between two subsequent BRP packets 415
  • a second IFS may separate between a last BRP packet of BRP packets 415 and feedback frame 424.
  • the IFS4 and/or the IFS3 may be defined, for example, to include an SB IFS, an MB IFS, a BRPIFS, and/or any other IFS.
  • the specific definition of the IFS3 and/or IFS4 may not be limited to a particular choice of IFS.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of the initiator training procedure 400, e.g., as described below.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to, during a TxSS sub- phase of an ITI, transmit to device 140 (Fig. 1) the plurality of BRP packets 415 to train antennas 107 (Fig. 1) of device 102 (Fig. 1).
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to transmit the plurality of BRP packets 415 over a channel bandwidth in the frequency band above 45 GHz.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to transmit the preamble 417 and the data field 419 of each of the plurality of BRP packets 415 via the same Tx antenna configuration of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the ITI, receive the plurality BRP packets 415 from the plurality of antennas 107 (Fig. 1) of device 102 (Fig. 1), for example, by receiving, for a BRP packet, e.g., for each BRP packet 415, the preamble 417 and the data field 419 of the BRP packet 415, for example, via the same Rx antenna configuration of the device 140 (Fig. 1), and by operating the m" 1 antenna of the plurality of antennas 147 (Fig. 1) at an omnidirectional configuration 423, for example, to receive the one or more TRN subfields 427 of the BRP packet 415, e.g., as described above.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to receive the plurality BRP packets 415 over the channel bandwidth in the frequency band above 45 GHz, e.g., as described above.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to transmit the feedback 424 to device 140 (Fig. 1), for example, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets 415 from device 140 (Fig. 1) , e.g., as described above.
  • feedback 424 may indicate a selected antenna setting corresponding to the m" 1 antenna of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to repeat the TxSS sub- phase of the beamforming ITI, based on the count of M antennas of the device 140, e.g., as described above.
  • the TRN subfields 427 of the TRN field 421 in the BRP packet 415 may correspond to a TxSS 411 of an n* antenna of antennas 107 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to switch from the antenna configuration if the preamble and PSDU to the n* antenna, for example, during a transition interval over the first TRN unit 413 of the BRP packet 415, e.g., as described above.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to switch between a plurality of AWVs, e.g., TxSS 411, of the n" 1 ' antenna, for example, during transmission of the TRN units 425 of TRN field 421, e.g., as described above.
  • AWVs e.g., TxSS 411
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to transmit the feedback 424 via a same Tx antenna configuration of device 140 (Fig. 1), for example, in each repetition of initiator training procedure 400, e.g., as described above.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1 to receive the feedback 424 via a same Rx antenna configuration of device 102 (Fig. 1), for example, in each repetition of initiator training procedure 400, e.g., as described above.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations and/or communications of a responder TX training procedure, e.g., as described below.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations and/or communications of the responder Tx training procedure, for example, during a responder training interval (RTI) of a TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
  • RTI responder training interval
  • Fig. 5 schematically illustrates a responder Tx training procedure 500, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • responder Tx training procedure 500 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 502 having N antennas and a responder 540 having M antennas.
  • device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 502, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 540.
  • antennas 107 (Fig. 1) may include N antennas, and/or antennas 147 (Fig. 1) may include M antennas.
  • one or more operations of Fig. 5 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of a TXSS-over-TRN training.
  • one or more operations of Fig. 6 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of a TXSS-over-TRN RTI training sub-phase, for example, for an n* antenna of initiator 502.
  • one or more operations of Fig. 5, may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140, for example, during an n* sub-phase 322 (Fig. 3) of RTI interval 330 (Fig. 3).
  • one or more of the operations of Fig. 5 may be repeated, for example, for N times, e.g. according to the number of antennas of initiator 502.
  • the responder Tx training procedure 500 may include one or more operations similar to the initiator Tx training procedure 400 (Fig. 4).
  • the RTI training sub- phase may defer from the ITI sub-phase, for example, in the sense that responder 540 may transmit a plurality of BRP frames 515 to initiator 502, for example, while the initiator 502 is to operate the n* antenna of initiator 502 at an omnidirectional mode 523, and the responder 540 may receive a feedback 524 and/or an ACK from device 502, for example, analogous to initiator training procedure 400 (Fig. 4), in which initiator 402 (Fig. 4) may transmit BRP frames 415 (Fig. 4) to responder 440 (Fig. 4), and receives feedback frame 424 (Fig. 4) from responder 440.
  • both the initiator and the responder may have full information on the best transmit sectors for PAAs/SAs, and may be able to select the best sectors for transmission to each other.
  • responder beamforming procedure 500 may be configured according to a reciprocity assumption, for example, assuming reciprocity between the Tx and Rx antennas of the initiator and responder, e.g., as described below.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of a responder training procedure under an antenna reciprocity assumption , e.g., as described below.
  • Fig. 6 schematically illustrates a responder Tx training procedure 600, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • responder training procedure 600 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 602 having N antennas and a responder 640 having M antennas.
  • device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 602, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 640.
  • antennas 107 (Fig. 1) may include N antennas, and/or antennas 147 (Fig. 1) may include M antennas.
  • one or more operations of Fig. 6 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of a TXSS-over-TRN training, e.g., under an assumption of reciprocity.
  • one or more operations of Fig. 6 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1, for example, as part of a TXSS-over-TRN RTI training sub-phase, for example, for an n* of initiator 602, e.g., under an assumption of sector reciprocity.
  • one or more of the operations of Fig. 6 may be repeated, for example, for N times according to the number of antennas of initiator 602.
  • the responder training procedure 600 may include one or more operations similar to the responder training procedure 500 (Fig. 5).
  • the initiator 602 may receive a plurality of BRP frames 615 from the responder 640, for example, while the initiator 602 may use a best sector for the n th antenna of the responder 640, for example, as selected during the ITI training, e.g., as indicated in the feedback 424 (Fig. 4) of the initiator training procedure 400 (Fig. 4), e.g., for the given m th antenna of responder640.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of an RxSS-over- TRN training procedure, e.g., as described below.
  • the RxSS-over-TRN training may optionally follow the TxSS-over-TRN training, for example, if the sector reciprocity assumption is not eligible, and/or for any other reason. In other embodiments, the RxSS-over-TRN training may be partially or fully excluded.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations during an RXSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
  • RXSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI may include an ITI RxSS and an RTI RxSS, for example, following the ITI RxSS, e.g., as described below.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations during the RTI of the RxSS sub-phase e.g., as described below.
  • Fig. 7, schematically illustrates a responder Rx training procedure 700, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • responder training procedure 700 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 702 having N antennas and a responder 740 having M antennas.
  • device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 702, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 740.
  • antennas 107 (Fig. 1) may include N antennas, and/or antennas 147 (Fig. 1) may include M antennas.
  • one or more operations of Fig. 7 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of an RXSS-over-TRN training.
  • one or more operations of Fig. 7 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of an RXSS-over-TRN RTI training sub-phase, for example, for an m" 1 antenna of responder 740.
  • one or more of the operations of Fig. 7 may be repeated, for example, for M times according to the number of antennas of responder 740.
  • initiator 702 may send N BRP packets 715, e.g., via the N antennas of initiator 702.
  • a BRP frame 715 may include, for example, a preamble part 717, a PSDU 719, and a TRN field 721.
  • TRN field 721 may include at least one first TRN unit 723 followed by a plurality of TRN units 725.
  • a TRN unit 725 may include a plurality of TRN subfields 727.
  • the initiator 702 may transmit the TRN units 725 using a selected, e.g., best, sector between the n th antenna of initiator 702 and the m th antenna of responder 740.
  • responder 740 may perform a receive sector sweep 712, e.g., over the m" 1 antenna of responder 740.
  • responder 740 may send an ACK frame 724, e.g., at the end of responder training procedure 700, for example, to confirm a successful completion of the Rx beamforming training.
  • devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of responder training procedure 700, e.g., as described below.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1), to transmit the plurality of BRP packets 715 from device 102 (Fig. 1) to device 140, for example, during an RTI of an RxSS sub-phase, e.g., responder Rx training procedure 700.
  • the preamble 717 and the data field 719 of each of the plurality of BRP packets 715 may be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • a TRN field 721 of each of the plurality of BRP packets 715 may be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • the selected sector may be determined based on the Tx training procedure, e.g., as described above.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1 to perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of device 140 (Fig. 1) over TRN field 721 of the BRP packet 715, for example, during an RTI of an RxSS sub-phase, e.g., responder RX training procedure 700.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to repeat the RxSS based on the count of antennas, e.g., the N antennas, of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to transmit acknowledgement 724 to device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to receive the acknowledgement 724 from device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to switch between a plurality of AWVs of the Rx antenna of device 140 (Fig. 1) during reception of the TRN field 721 of a BRP packet 715 of the plurality of BRP packets 715, e.g., as described above.
  • controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to repeat the RxSS sub- phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., responder RX training procedure 700, for example, based on a count of the plurality of antennas, e.g., the M antennas, of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to repeat the RxSS sub- phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., responder training procedure 700, for example, based on the count of the plurality of antennas, e.g., the M antennas, of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • FIG. 8 schematically illustrates an initiator Rx training procedure 800, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • initiator training procedure 800 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 802 having N antennas and a responder 840 having M antennas.
  • device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 802, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 840.
  • antennas 107 (Fig. 1) may include N antennas
  • antennas 147 (Fig. 1) may include M antennas.
  • one or more operations of Fig. 8 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of an RxSS-over-TRN training.
  • one or more operations of Fig. 8 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of an RxSS-over-TRN ITI training sub-phase, for example, for an n* antenna of initiator 702.
  • one or more of the operations of Fig. 8 may be repeated, for example, for N times according to the number of antennas of initiator 702.
  • the initiator training procedure 800 may include one or more operations similar to the responder training procedure 700 (Fig. 7).
  • the responder 840 may transmit BRP packets 815 including TRN units 821 using a best sector between an m th antenna of responder 840 and an n th antenna of initiator 802 .
  • the initiator 802 may perform a receive sector sweep 812, e.g., of the n th antenna of initiator 802, for example, over the TRN units 721.
  • initiator 802 may send an ACK frame 824, e.g., at the end of initiator training procedure 800, for example, to confirm a successful completion of the RX beamforming training.
  • both the initiator and the responder may have full information on the best Tx/Rx sectors for PAAs/SAs and can select the best sectors for transmission/reception.
  • the beamforming training sub-phases described herein may allow, for example, to complete an SLS training protocol.
  • Fig. 9 schematically illustrates a method of beamforming, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
  • one or more of the operations of the method of Fig. 9 may be performed by one or more elements of a system, e.g., system 100 (Fig. 1), for example, one or more wireless devices, e.g., device 102 (Fig. 1), and/or device 140 (Fig. 1); a controller, e.g., controller 124 (Fig. 1), and/or controller 154 (Fig. 1); a radio, e.g., radio 114 (Fig.
  • a transmitter e.g., transmitter 118 (Fig. 1), and/or transmitter 148 (Fig. 1
  • a receiver e.g., receiver 116 (Fig. 1), and/or receiver 146 (Fig. 1
  • a message processor e.g., message processor 128 (Fig. 1), and/or message processor 158 (Fig. 1).
  • the method may include during a TxSS sub- phase of a beamforming TI, transmitting from a first EDMG STA to a second EDMG STA a plurality of BRP packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
  • transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets may include a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of the BRP packet.
  • controller 124 (Fig. 1) may control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit the plurality of BRP packets 415 (Fig.
  • transmission of a BRP packet 415 (Fig. 4) of the plurality of BRP packets 415 (Fig. 4) may include a TxSS of the antenna of the plurality of antennas of device 102 (Fig. 1) over the TRN field 421 (Fig. 4) of the BRP packet 415 (Fig. 4), e.g., as described above.
  • the method may include, during the TxSS sub- phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receiving a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA.
  • controller 124 may control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to receive feedback 424 (Fig. 4) from device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., after the transmission of the plurality of BRP packets 415 (Fig. 4).
  • feedback 424 (Fig. 4) may indicate the selected antenna setting of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • the method may include repeating the TxSS sub- phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • controller 124 may control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. ) to repeat the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on the count of antennas of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • Fig. 10 schematically illustrates a method of beamforming.
  • one or more of the operations of the method of Fig. 10 may be performed by one or more elements of a system, e.g., system 100 (Fig. 1), for example, one or more wireless devices, e.g., device 102 (Fig. 1), and/or device 140 (Fig. 1); a controller, e.g., controller 124 (Fig. 1), and/or controller 154 (Fig. 1); a radio, e.g., radio 114 (Fig. 1), and/or radio 144 (Fig. 1); a transmitter, e.g., transmitter 118 (Fig. 1), and/or transmitter 148 (Fig.
  • a receiver e.g., receiver 116 (Fig. 1), and/or receiver 146 (Fig. 1); and/or a message processor, e.g., message processor 128 (Fig. 1), and/or message processor 158 (Fig. 1).
  • the method may include during a TxSS sub- phase of a beamforming TI, receiving at a first EDMG STA a plurality of BRP packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA.
  • receiving plurality of BRP packets may include receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Rx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more TRN subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet.
  • controller 154 Fig.
  • controller 154 may control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to receive the plurality of BRP packets 415 (Fig. 4) from the plurality of antennas of device 102 (Fig. 1), for example, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described above.
  • controller 154 may control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to receive, e.g., for each BRP packet 415 (Fig. 4) of the plurality of packets 415 (Fig. 4), a preamble 417 (Fig. 4) and a data field 419 (Fig. 4) of the BRP packet 415 (Fig. 4) via the Rx antenna configuration of device 140 (Fig.
  • the method may include during the TxSS sub- phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmitting a feedback to the second EDMG STA.
  • the feedback to the second EDMG STA may indicate a selected antenna setting of the second EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the first EDMG STA.
  • controller 154 may control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to transmit feedback 242 (Fig. 4) to device 102 (Fig. 1) to indicate a selected antenna setting of device 102 (fig. 1) corresponding to the antenna m" 1 of device 140 (Fig. 1), for example, ), subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, 415 (Fig. 4), e.g., as described above.
  • the method may include, repeating the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, for example, based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
  • controller 154 may control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to repeat the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
  • Product 1100 may include one or more tangible computer-readable (“machine-readable”) non- transitory storage media 1102, which may include computer-executable instructions, e.g., implemented by logic 1104, operable to, when executed by at least one computer processor, enable the at least one computer processor to implement one or more operations at device 102 (Fig. 1), device 140 (Fig. 1), radio 114 (Fig. 1), radio 144 (Fig. 1), transmitter 118 (Fig. 1), transmitter 148 (Fig. 1), receiver 116 (Fig. 1), 1), receiver 146 (Fig. 1), controller 124 (Fig. 1), controller 154 (Fig.
  • non-transitory machine -readable medium is directed to include all computer-readable media, with the sole exception being a transitory propagating signal.
  • product 1100 and/or storage media 1102 may include one or more types of computer-readable storage media capable of storing data, including volatile memory, non-volatile memory, removable or nonremovable memory, erasable or non-erasable memory, writeable or re-writeable memory, and the like.
  • machine-readable storage media 702 may include, RAM, DRAM, Double-Data-Rate DRAM (DDR-DRAM), SDRAM, static RAM (SRAM), ROM, programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM), Compact Disk ROM (CD-ROM), Compact Disk Recordable (CD-R), Compact Disk Rewriteable (CD-RW), flash memory (e.g., NOR or NAND flash memory), content addressable memory (CAM), polymer memory, phase-change memory, ferroelectric memory, silicon-oxide-nitride-oxide-silicon (SONOS) memory, a disk, a floppy disk, a hard drive, an optical disk, a magnetic disk, a card, a magnetic card, an optical card, a tape, a cassette, and the like.
  • RAM random access memory
  • DDR-DRAM Double-Data-Rate DRAM
  • SDRAM static RAM
  • ROM read-only memory
  • the computer-readable storage media may include any suitable media involved with downloading or transferring a computer program from a remote computer to a requesting computer carried by data signals embodied in a carrier wave or other propagation medium through a communication link, e.g., a modem, radio or network connection.
  • a communication link e.g., a modem, radio or network connection.
  • logic 1104 may include instructions, data, and/or code, which, if executed by a machine, may cause the machine to perform a method, process and/or operations as described herein.
  • the machine may include, for example, any suitable processing platform, computing platform, computing device, processing device, computing system, processing system, computer, processor, or the like, and may be implemented using any suitable combination of hardware, software, firmware, and the like.
  • logic 1104 may include, or may be implemented as, software, firmware, a software module, an application, a program, a subroutine, instructions, an instruction set, computing code, words, values, symbols, and the like.
  • the instructions may include any suitable type of code, such as source code, compiled code, interpreted code, executable code, static code, dynamic code, and the like.
  • the instructions may be implemented according to a predefined computer language, manner or syntax, for instructing a processor to perform a certain function.
  • the instructions may be implemented using any suitable high-level, low- level, object-oriented, visual, compiled and/or interpreted programming language, such as C, C++, Java, BASIC, Matlab, Pascal, Visual BASIC, assembly language, machine code, and the like.
  • Example 1 includes an apparatus comprising logic and circuitry configured to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmit to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receive a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and repeat the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming
  • EDMG
  • Example 2 includes the subject matter of Example 1, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 3 includes the subject matter of Example 1 or 2, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to begin the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 4 includes the subject matter of Example 3, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 5 includes the subject matter of Example 3 or 4, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
  • Example 6 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-5, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
  • AMVs Antenna Weight Vectors
  • Example 7 includes the subject matter of Example 6, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field.
  • Example 8 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-7, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 9 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-8, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to perform a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets.
  • Example 10 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-9, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA; repeat the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and transmit an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
  • RxSS Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep
  • Example 11 includes the subject matter of Example 10, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
  • AMVs Antenna Weight Vectors
  • Example 12 includes the subject matter of Example 11, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 13 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 10-12, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 14 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-13, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • Example 15 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-13, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
  • RTI Responder TI
  • Example 16 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-15, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter- Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
  • IFS Inter- Frame-Space
  • Example 17 includes the subject matter of Example 16, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
  • Example 18 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-17, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • Example 19 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-18, and optionally, comprising a radio to transmit the plurality of BRP packets.
  • Example 20 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-19, and optionally, comprising the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, a memory, and a processor.
  • Example 21 includes a system of wireless communication comprising a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the first EDMG STA comprising a plurality of antennas; a radio; a memory; a processor; and a controller configured to cause the first EDMG STA to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmit to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receive a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the
  • Example 22 includes the subject matter of Example 21, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 23 includes the subject matter of Example 21 or 22, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to begin the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 24 includes the subject matter of Example 23, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 25 includes the subject matter of Example 23 or 24, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
  • Example 26 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-25, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
  • AMVs Antenna Weight Vectors
  • Example 27 includes the subject matter of Example 26, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field.
  • Example 28 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-27, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Rx Receive
  • Example 29 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-28, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to perform a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets.
  • Example 30 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-29, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA; repeat the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and transmit an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
  • RxSS Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep
  • Example 31 includes the subject matter of Example 30, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
  • AMVs Antenna Weight Vectors
  • Example 32 includes the subject matter of Example 31, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 33 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 30-32, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 34 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-33, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
  • Example 35 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-33, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • RTI Responder TI
  • Example 36 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-35, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
  • IFS Inter-Frame-Space
  • Example 37 includes the subject matter of Example 36, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
  • Example 38 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-37, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • Example 39 includes a method to be performed at a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the method comprising during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmitting to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receiving a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and repeating the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming
  • Tx
  • Example 40 includes the subject matter of Example 39, and optionally, comprising transmitting a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 41 includes the subject matter of Example 39 or 40, and optionally, comprising beginning the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 42 includes the subject matter of Example 41, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 43 includes the subject matter of Example 41 or 42, and optionally, comprising switching to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
  • Example 44 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-43, and optionally, comprising switching between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
  • AMVs Antenna Weight Vectors
  • Example 45 includes the subject matter of Example 44, and optionally, comprising switching between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field.
  • Example 46 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-45, and optionally, comprising, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receiving the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 47 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-46, and optionally, comprising performing a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets.
  • Example 48 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-47, and optionally, comprising, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI performing an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA; repeating the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and transmitting an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
  • Rx Receive
  • RxSS Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep
  • Example 49 includes the subject matter of Example 48, and optionally, comprising switching between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 50 includes the subject matter of Example 49, and optionally, comprising switching between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
  • ADVs Antenna Weight Vectors
  • Example 51 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 48-50, and optionally, comprising repeating the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 52 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-51, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • Example 53 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-51, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
  • RTI Responder TI
  • Example 54 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-53, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
  • IFS Inter-Frame-Space
  • Example 55 includes the subject matter of Example 54, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
  • Example 56 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-55, and optionally, comprising transmitting the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • GHz Gigahertz
  • Example 57 includes a product comprising one or more tangible computer- readable non-transitory storage media comprising computer-executable instructions operable to, when executed by at least one processor, enable the at least one processor to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmit to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receive a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback
  • Example 58 includes the subject matter of Example 57, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to transmit a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 59 includes the subject matter of Example 57 or 58, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to begin the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 60 includes the subject matter of Example 59, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 61 includes the subject matter of Example 59 or 60, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
  • Example 62 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-61, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
  • AMVs Antenna Weight Vectors
  • Example 63 includes the subject matter of Example 62, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field.
  • Example 64 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-63, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 65 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-64, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to perform a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets.
  • Example 66 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-65, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA; repeat the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and transmit an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
  • Rx Receive
  • RxSS Receive
  • Example 67 includes the subject matter of Example 66, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
  • AMVs Antenna Weight Vectors
  • Example 68 includes the subject matter of Example 67, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 69 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 66-68, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 70 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-69, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • Example 71 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-69, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
  • RTI Responder TI
  • Example 72 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-71, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
  • IFS Inter-Frame-Space
  • Example 73 includes the subject matter of Example 72, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
  • Example 74 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-73, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • Example 75 includes an apparatus of wireless communication by a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the apparatus comprising means for, during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmitting to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; means for, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receiving a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and means for repeating the TxSS
  • Example 76 includes the subject matter of Example 75, and optionally, comprising means for transmitting a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 77 includes the subject matter of Example 75 or 76, and optionally, comprising means for beginning the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 78 includes the subject matter of Example 77, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 79 includes the subject matter of Example 77 or 78, and optionally, comprising means for switching to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
  • Example 80 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-79, and optionally, comprising means for switching between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
  • AMVs Antenna Weight Vectors
  • Example 81 includes the subject matter of Example 80, and optionally, comprising means for switching between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field.
  • Example 82 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-81, and optionally, comprising means for, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receiving the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 83 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-82, and optionally, comprising means for performing a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets.
  • Example 84 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-83, and optionally, comprising means for, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub- phase of the beamforming TI performing an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA; repeating the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and transmitting an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
  • Rx Receive
  • RxSS Receive
  • RxSS Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep
  • Example 85 includes the subject matter of Example 84, and optionally, comprising means for switching between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
  • AMVs Antenna Weight Vectors
  • Example 86 includes the subject matter of Example 85, and optionally, comprising means for switching between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 87 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 84-86, and optionally, comprising means for repeating the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 88 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-87, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • Example 89 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-87, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
  • RTI Responder TI
  • Example 90 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-89, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
  • IFS Inter-Frame-Space
  • Example 91 includes the subject matter of Example 90, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
  • Example 92 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-91, and optionally, comprising means for transmitting the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • GHz Gigahertz
  • Example 93 includes an apparatus comprising logic and circuitry configured to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receive a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmit a feedback to the second EDMG STA, the feedback to the second EDMG
  • Example 94 includes the subject matter of Example 93, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields of the TRN field correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 95 includes the subject matter of Example 94, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 96 includes the subject matter of Example 95, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 97 includes the subject matter of Example 95 or 96, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the first EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
  • Example 98 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-97, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 99 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-98, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI transmit a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and receive an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
  • RxSS Rx Sector Sweep
  • Example 100 includes the subject matter of Example 99, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 101 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-100, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • Example 102 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-100, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
  • RTI Responder TI
  • Example 103 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-102, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter- Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
  • IFS Inter- Frame-Space
  • Example 104 includes the subject matter of Example 103, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
  • Example 105 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-104, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to receive the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to receive the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • Example 106 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-105, and optionally, comprising a radio to receive the plurality of BRP packets.
  • Example 107 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-106, and optionally, comprising the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, a memory, and a processor.
  • Example 108 includes a system of wireless communication comprising a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the first EDMG STA comprising a plurality of antennas; a radio; a memory; a processor; and a controller configured to cause the first EDMG STA to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receive a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet; during the T
  • Tx
  • Example 109 includes the subject matter of Example 108, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields of the TRN field correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 110 includes the subject matter of Example 109, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 111 includes the subject matter of Example 110, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 112 includes the subject matter of Example 110 or 111, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the first EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
  • Example 113 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-112, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 114 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-113, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI transmit a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and receive an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
  • RxSS Rx Sector Sweep
  • Example 115 includes the subject matter of Example 114, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 116 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-115, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • Example 117 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-115, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
  • RTI Responder TI
  • Example 118 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-117, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter- Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
  • IFS Inter- Frame-Space
  • Example 119 includes the subject matter of Example 118, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
  • Example 120 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-119, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to receive the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to receive the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • Example 121 includes a method to be performed at a first Enhanced Directional Multi- Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the method comprising during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receiving a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmitting a feedback to the second EDMG STA, the feedback to the second EDMG STA
  • Example 122 includes the subject matter of Example 121, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields of the TRN field correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 123 includes the subject matter of Example 122, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 124 includes the subject matter of Example 123, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 125 includes the subject matter of Example 123 or 124, and optionally, comprising switching to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the first EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
  • Example 126 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-125, and optionally, comprising, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmitting the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 127 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-126, and optionally, comprising, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI transmitting a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and receiving an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
  • RxSS Rx Sector Sweep
  • Example 128 includes the subject matter of Example 127, and optionally, comprising repeating the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 129 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-128, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • Example 130 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-128, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
  • RTI Responder TI
  • Example 131 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-130, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter- Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
  • IFS Inter- Frame-Space
  • Example 132 includes the subject matter of Example 131, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
  • Example 133 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-132, and optionally, comprising receiving the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • Example 134 includes a product comprising one or more tangible computer-readable non-transitory storage media comprising computer-executable instructions operable to, when executed by at least one processor, enable the at least one processor to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receive a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-
  • Example 135 includes the subject matter of Example 134, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields of the TRN field correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 136 includes the subject matter of Example 135, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 137 includes the subject matter of Example 136, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 138 includes the subject matter of Example 136 or 137, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the first EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
  • Example 139 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-138, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 140 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-139, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI transmit a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and receive an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
  • RxSS Rx Sector Sweep
  • Example 141 includes the subject matter of Example 140, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 142 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-141, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • Example 143 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-141, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
  • RTI Responder TI
  • Example 144 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-143, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
  • IFS Inter-Frame-Space
  • Example 145 includes the subject matter of Example 144, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
  • Example 146 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-145, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to receive the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • Example 147 includes an apparatus of wireless communication by a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the apparatus comprising means for, during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receiving a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet; means for, during the TxSS sub-phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmitting a feedback to the second EDMG STA, the feedback
  • Example 148 includes the subject matter of Example 147, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields of the TRN field correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 149 includes the subject matter of Example 148, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 150 includes the subject matter of Example 149, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
  • Example 151 includes the subject matter of Example 149 or 150, and optionally, comprising means for switching to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the first EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
  • Example 152 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-151, and optionally, comprising means for, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmitting the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
  • Example 153 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-152, and optionally, comprising means for, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI transmitting a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and receiving an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
  • RxSS Rx Sector Sweep
  • Example 154 includes the subject matter of Example 153, and optionally, comprising means for repeating the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
  • Example 155 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-154, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
  • ITI Initiator TI
  • Example 156 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-154, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
  • Example 157 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-156, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter- Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
  • IFS Inter- Frame-Space
  • Example 158 includes the subject matter of Example 157, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
  • Example 159 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-158, and optionally, comprising means for receiving the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
  • GHz Gigahertz

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

For example, an apparatus may be configured to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to, during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmit to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets including a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, to receive a feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and to repeat the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA.

Description

APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF BEAMFORMING
CROSS REFERENCE
[001] This Application claims the benefit of and priority from US Provisional Patent Application No. 62/437,887 entitled "APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF BEAMFORMING OVER A DIRECTIONAL FREQUENCY BAND", filed December 22, 2016, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
TECHNICAL FIELD
[002] Embodiments described herein generally relate to beamforming.
BACKGROUND
[003] A wireless communication network in a millimeter-wave band may provide high-speed data access for users of wireless communication devices.
[004] A beamforming procedure may be configured to steer a first directional antenna of a first wireless communication device, e.g., a beamforming initiator (BI), and a second directional antenna of a second wireless communication device, e.g., a beamforming responder (BR). The beamforming procedure may be performed, for example, to establish a high throughout communication link between the BI and the BR, e.g., at an acceptable communication range between the BR and the BI.
[005] The beamforming procedure may include a Sector Level Sweep (SLS) procedure. The beamforming procedure may include a Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) phase, e.g., following the SLS procedure.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[006] For simplicity and clarity of illustration, elements shown in the figures have not necessarily been drawn to scale. For example, the dimensions of some of the elements may be exaggerated relative to other elements for clarity of presentation. Furthermore, reference numerals may be repeated among the figures to indicate corresponding or analogous elements. The figures are listed below.
[007] Fig. 1 is a schematic block diagram illustration of a system, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[008] Fig. 2 is a schematic illustration of a Training (TRN) unit, which may be implemented in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[009] Fig. 3 is a schematic illustration of a transmit (Tx) beamforming procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[0010] Fig. 4 is a schematic illustration of an initiator Tx training procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[0011] Fig. 5 is a schematic illustration of a responder Tx training procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[0012] Fig. 6 is a schematic illustration of a responder Tx training procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[0013] Fig. 7 is a schematic illustration of a responder receive (Rx) training procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[0014] Fig. 8 is a schematic illustration of an initiator Rx training procedure, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[0015] Fig. 9 is a schematic flow-chart illustration of a method of beamforming, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[0016] Fig. 10 is a schematic flow-chart illustration of a method of beamforming, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[0017] Fig. 11 is a schematic illustration of a product of manufacture, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0018] In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of some embodiments. However, it will be understood by persons of ordinary skill in the art that some embodiments may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, units and/or circuits have not been described in detail so as not to obscure the discussion.
[0019] Discussions herein utilizing terms such as, for example, "processing", "computing", "calculating", "determining", "establishing", "analyzing", "checking", or the like, may refer to operation(s) and/or process(es) of a computer, a computing platform, a computing system, or other electronic computing device, that manipulate and/or transform data represented as physical (e.g., electronic) quantities within the computer' s registers and/or memories into other data similarly represented as physical quantities within the computer's registers and/or memories or other information storage medium that may store instructions to perform operations and/or processes.
[0020] The terms "plurality" and "a plurality", as used herein, include, for example, "multiple" or "two or more". For example, "a plurality of items" includes two or more items.
[0021] References to "one embodiment", "an embodiment", "demonstrative embodiment", "various embodiments" etc., indicate that the embodiment(s) so described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but not every embodiment necessarily includes the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Further, repeated use of the phrase "in one embodiment" does not necessarily refer to the same embodiment, although it may.
[0022] As used herein, unless otherwise specified the use of the ordinal adjectives "first", "second", "third" etc., to describe a common object, merely indicate that different instances of like objects are being referred to, and are not intended to imply that the objects so described must be in a given sequence, either temporally, spatially, in ranking, or in any other manner.
[0023] Some embodiments may be used in conjunction with various devices and systems, for example, a User Equipment (UE), a Mobile Device (MD), a wireless station (STA), a Personal Computer (PC), a desktop computer, a mobile computer, a laptop computer, a notebook computer, a tablet computer, a server computer, a handheld computer, a handheld device, a wearable device, a sensor device, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) device, a handheld PDA device, an on-board device, an off -board device, a hybrid device, a vehicular device, a non- vehicular device, a mobile or portable device, a consumer device, a non-mobile or non-portable device, a wireless communication station, a wireless communication device, a wireless Access Point (AP), a wired or wireless router, a wired or wireless modem, a video device, an audio device, an audio-video (A/V) device, a wired or wireless network, a wireless area network, a Wireless Video Area Network (WVAN), a Local Area Network (LAN), a Wireless LAN (WLAN), a Personal Area Network (PAN), a Wireless PAN (WPAN), and the like.
[0024] Some embodiments may be used in conjunction with devices and/or networks operating in accordance with existing IEEE 802.11 standards (including IEEE 802.11-2016 {IEEE 802.11-2016, IEEE Standard for Information technology- Telecommunications and information exchange between systems Local and metropolitan area networks— Specific requirements Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications, December 7, 2016); and/or IEEE 802.11 ay (P802.11ay Standard for Information Technology- Telecommunications and Information Exchange Between Systems Local and Metropolitan Area Networks— Specific Requirements Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications— Amendment: Enhanced Throughput for Operation in License -Exempt Bands Above 45 GHz)) and/or future versions and/or derivatives thereof, devices and/or networks operating in accordance with existing WiFi Alliance (WFA) Peer-to-Peer (P2P) specifications (including WiFi P2P technical specification, version 1.5, August 4, 2015) and/or future versions and/or derivatives thereof, devices and/or networks operating in accordance with existing Wireless-Gigabit-Alliance (WGA) specifications (including Wireless Gigabit Alliance, Inc WiGig MAC and PHY Specification Version 1.1, April 2011, Final specification) and/or future versions and/or derivatives thereof, devices and/or networks operating in accordance with existing cellular specifications and/or protocols, e.g., 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), 3GPP Long Term Evolution (LTE) and/or future versions and/or derivatives thereof, units and/or devices which are part of the above networks, and the like. [0025] Some embodiments may be used in conjunction with one way and/or two- way radio communication systems, cellular radio-telephone communication systems, a mobile phone, a cellular telephone, a wireless telephone, a Personal Communication Systems (PCS) device, a PDA device which incorporates a wireless communication device, a mobile or portable Global Positioning System (GPS) device, a device which incorporates a GPS receiver or transceiver or chip, a device which incorporates an RFID element or chip, a Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) transceiver or device, a Single Input Multiple Output (SIMO) transceiver or device, a Multiple Input Single Output (MISO) transceiver or device, a device having one or more internal antennas and/or external antennas, Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) devices or systems, multi- standard radio devices or systems, a wired or wireless handheld device, e.g., a Smartphone, a Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) device, or the like.
[0026] Some embodiments may be used in conjunction with one or more types of wireless communication signals and/or systems, for example, Radio Frequency (RF), Infra Red (IR), Frequency-Division Multiplexing (FDM), Orthogonal FDM (OFDM), Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access (OFDM A), FDM Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM), Time-Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Multi-User MIMO (MU-MIMO), Spatial Division Multiple Access (SDMA), Extended TDMA (E- TDMA), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), extended GPRS, Code-Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Wideband CDMA (WCDMA), CDMA 2000, single- carrier CDMA, multi-carrier CDMA, Multi-Carrier Modulation (MDM), Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT), Bluetooth®, Global Positioning System (GPS), Wi-Fi, Wi-Max, ZigBee™, Ultra- Wideband (UWB), Global System for Mobile communication (GSM), 2G, 2.5G, 3G, 3.5G, 4G, Fifth Generation (5G), or Sixth Generation (6G) mobile networks, 3GPP, Long Term Evolution (LTE), LTE advanced, Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE), or the like. Other embodiments may be used in various other devices, systems and/or networks.
[0027] The term "wireless device", as used herein, includes, for example, a device capable of wireless communication, a communication device capable of wireless communication, a communication station capable of wireless communication, a portable or non-portable device capable of wireless communication, or the like. In some demonstrative embodiments, a wireless device may be or may include a peripheral that is integrated with a computer, or a peripheral that is attached to a computer. In some demonstrative embodiments, the term "wireless device" may optionally include a wireless service.
[0028] The term "communicating" as used herein with respect to a communication signal includes transmitting the communication signal and/or receiving the communication signal. For example, a communication unit, which is capable of communicating a communication signal, may include a transmitter to transmit the communication signal to at least one other communication unit, and/or a communication receiver to receive the communication signal from at least one other communication unit. The verb communicating may be used to refer to the action of transmitting or the action of receiving. In one example, the phrase "communicating a signal" may refer to the action of transmitting the signal by a first device, and may not necessarily include the action of receiving the signal by a second device. In another example, the phrase "communicating a signal" may refer to the action of receiving the signal by a first device, and may not necessarily include the action of transmitting the signal by a second device. The communication signal may be transmitted and/or received, for example, in the form of Radio Frequency (RF) communication signals, and/or any other type of signal.
[0029] As used herein, the term "circuitry" may refer to, be part of, or include, an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), an integrated circuit, an electronic circuit, a processor (shared, dedicated, or group), and/or memory (shared, dedicated, or group), that execute one or more software or firmware programs, a combinational logic circuit, and/or other suitable hardware components that provide the described functionality. In some embodiments, the circuitry may be implemented in, or functions associated with the circuitry may be implemented by, one or more software or firmware modules. In some embodiments, circuitry may include logic, at least partially operable in hardware.
[0030] The term "logic" may refer, for example, to computing logic embedded in circuitry of a computing apparatus and/or computing logic stored in a memory of a computing apparatus. For example, the logic may be accessible by a processor of the computing apparatus to execute the computing logic to perform computing functions and/or operations. In one example, logic may be embedded in various types of memory and/or firmware, e.g., silicon blocks of various chips and/or processors. Logic may be included in, and/or implemented as part of, various circuitry, e.g. radio circuitry, receiver circuitry, control circuitry, transmitter circuitry, transceiver circuitry, processor circuitry, and/or the like. In one example, logic may be embedded in volatile memory and/or non-volatile memory, including random access memory, read only memory, programmable memory, magnetic memory, flash memory, persistent memory, and the like. Logic may be executed by one or more processors using memory, e.g., registers, stuck, buffers, and/or the like, coupled to the one or more processors, e.g., as necessary to execute the logic.
[0031] Some demonstrative embodiments may be used in conjunction with a WLAN, e.g., a WiFi network. Other embodiments may be used in conjunction with any other suitable wireless communication network, for example, a wireless area network, a "piconet", a WPAN, a WVAN and the like.
[0032] Some demonstrative embodiments may be used in conjunction with a wireless communication network communicating over a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz), e.g., 60GHz. However, other embodiments may be implemented utilizing any other suitable wireless communication frequency bands, for example, an Extremely High Frequency (EHF) band (the millimeter wave (mmWave) frequency band), e.g., a frequency band within the frequency band of between 20Ghz and 300GHz, a frequency band above 45GHz, a frequency band below 20GHz, e.g., a Sub 1 GHz (S1G) band, a 2.4GHz band, a 5GHz band, a WLAN frequency band, a WPAN frequency band, a frequency band according to the WGA specification, and the like.
[0033] The term "antenna", as used herein, may include any suitable configuration, structure and/or arrangement of one or more antenna elements, components, units, assemblies and/or arrays. In some embodiments, the antenna may implement transmit and receive functionalities using separate transmit and receive antenna elements. In some embodiments, the antenna may implement transmit and receive functionalities using common and/or integrated transmit/receive elements. The antenna may include, for example, a phased array antenna, a single element antenna, a set of switched beam antennas, and/or the like.
[0034] The phrases "directional multi-gigabit (DMG)" and "directional band" (DBand), as used herein, may relate to a frequency band wherein the Channel starting frequency is above 45 GHz. In one example, DMG communications may involve one or more directional links to communicate at a rate of multiple gigabits per second, for example, at least 1 Gigabit per second, e.g., at least 7 Gigabit per second, at least 30 Gigabit per second, or any other rate.
[0035] Some demonstrative embodiments may be implemented by a DMG STA (also referred to as a "mmWave STA (mSTA)"), which may include for example, a STA having a radio transmitter, which is capable of operating on a channel that is within the DMG band. The DMG STA may perform other additional or alternative functionality. Other embodiments may be implemented by any other apparatus, device and/or station.
[0036] Reference is made to Fig. 1, which schematically illustrates a system 100, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[0037] As shown in Fig. 1, in some demonstrative embodiments, system 100 may include one or more wireless communication devices. For example, system 100 may include a wireless communication device 102, a wireless communication device 140, and/or one more other devices.
[0038] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may include a mobile device or a non-mobile, e.g., a static, device.
[0039] For example, devices 102 and/or 140 may include, for example, a UE, an MD, a STA, an AP, a PC, a desktop computer, a mobile computer, a laptop computer, an Ultrabook™ computer, a notebook computer, a tablet computer, a server computer, a handheld computer, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, a sensor device, a handheld device, a wearable device, a PDA device, a handheld PDA device, an on-board device, an off-board device, a hybrid device (e.g., combining cellular phone functionalities with PDA device functionalities), a consumer device, a vehicular device, a non-vehicular device, a mobile or portable device, a non-mobile or nonportable device, a mobile phone, a cellular telephone, a PCS device, a PDA device which incorporates a wireless communication device, a mobile or portable GPS device, a DVB device, a relatively small computing device, a non-desktop computer, a "Carry Small Live Large" (CSLL) device, an Ultra Mobile Device (UMD), an Ultra Mobile PC (UMPC), a Mobile Internet Device (MID), an "Origami" device or computing device, a device that supports Dynamically Composable Computing (DCC), a context-aware device, a video device, an audio device, an A/V device, a Set- Top-Box (STB), a Blu-ray disc (BD) player, a BD recorder, a Digital Video Disc (DVD) player, a High Definition (HD) DVD player, a DVD recorder, a HD DVD recorder, a Personal Video Recorder (PVR), a broadcast HD receiver, a video source, an audio source, a video sink, an audio sink, a stereo tuner, a broadcast radio receiver, a flat panel display, a Personal Media Player (PMP), a digital video camera (DVC), a digital audio player, a speaker, an audio receiver, an audio amplifier, a gaming device, a data source, a data sink, a Digital Still camera (DSC), a media player, a Smartphone, a television, a music player, or the like.
[0040] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 may include, for example, one or more of a processor 191, an input unit 192, an output unit 193, a memory unit 194, and/or a storage unit 195; and/or device 140 may include, for example, one or more of a processor 181, an input unit 182, an output unit 183, a memory unit 184, and/or a storage unit 185. Devices 102 and/or 140 may optionally include other suitable hardware components and/or software components. In some demonstrative embodiments, some or all of the components of one or more of devices 102 and/or 140 may be enclosed in a common housing or packaging, and may be interconnected or operably associated using one or more wired or wireless links. In other embodiments, components of one or more of devices 102 and/or 140 may be distributed among multiple or separate devices.
[0041] In some demonstrative embodiments, processor 191 and/or processor 181 may include, for example, a Central Processing Unit (CPU), a Digital Signal Processor (DSP), one or more processor cores, a single-core processor, a dual-core processor, a multiple-core processor, a microprocessor, a host processor, a controller, a plurality of processors or controllers, a chip, a microchip, one or more circuits, circuitry, a logic unit, an Integrated Circuit (IC), an Application-Specific IC (ASIC), or any other suitable multi-purpose or specific processor or controller. Processor 191 may execute instructions, for example, of an Operating System (OS) of device 102 and/or of one or more suitable applications. Processor 181 may execute instructions, for example, of an Operating System (OS) of device 140 and/or of one or more suitable applications.
[0042] In some demonstrative embodiments, input unit 192 and/or input unit 182 may include, for example, a keyboard, a keypad, a mouse, a touch-screen, a touch- pad, a track-ball, a stylus, a microphone, or other suitable pointing device or input device. Output unit 193 and/or output unit 183 may include, for example, a monitor, a screen, a touch-screen, a flat panel display, a Light Emitting Diode (LED) display unit, a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) display unit, a plasma display unit, one or more audio speakers or earphones, or other suitable output devices.
[0043] In some demonstrative embodiments, memory unit 194 and/or memory unit 184 includes, for example, a Random Access Memory (RAM), a Read Only Memory (ROM), a Dynamic RAM (DRAM), a Synchronous DRAM (SD-RAM), a flash memory, a volatile memory, a non-volatile memory, a cache memory, a buffer, a short term memory unit, a long term memory unit, or other suitable memory units. Storage unit 195 and/or storage unit 185 may include, for example, a hard disk drive, a floppy disk drive, a Compact Disk (CD) drive, a CD-ROM drive, a DVD drive, or other suitable removable or non-removable storage units. Memory unit 194 and/or storage unit 195, for example, may store data processed by device 102. Memory unit 184 and/or storage unit 185, for example, may store data processed by device 140.
[0044] In some demonstrative embodiments, wireless communication devices 102 and/or 140 may be capable of communicating content, data, information and/or signals via a wireless medium (WM) 103. In some demonstrative embodiments, wireless medium 103 may include, for example, a radio channel, a cellular channel, an RF channel, a WiFi channel, an IR channel, a Bluetooth (BT) channel, a Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Channel, and the like.
[0045] In some demonstrative embodiments, WM 103 may include one or more directional bands and/or channels. For example, WM 103 may include one or more millimeter-wave (mmWave) wireless communication bands and/or channels.
[0046] In some demonstrative embodiments, WM 103 may include one or more DMG channels. In other embodiments WM 103 may include any other directional channels.
[0047] In other embodiments, WM 103 may include any other type of channel over any other frequency band.
[0048] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 and/or device 140 may include one or more radios including circuitry and/or logic to perform wireless communication between devices 102, 140 and/or one or more other wireless communication devices. For example, device 102 may include at least one radio 114, and/or device 140 may include at least one radio 144.
[0049] In some demonstrative embodiments, radio 114 and/or radio 144 may include one or more wireless receivers (Rx) including circuitry and/or logic to receive wireless communication signals, RF signals, frames, blocks, transmission streams, packets, messages, data items, and/or data. For example, radio 114 may include at least one receiver 116, and/or radio 144 may include at least one receiver 146.
[0050] In some demonstrative embodiments, radio 114 and/or radio 144 may include one or more wireless transmitters (Tx) including circuitry and/or logic to transmit wireless communication signals, RF signals, frames, blocks, transmission streams, packets, messages, data items, and/or data. For example, radio 114 may include at least one transmitter 118, and/or radio 144 may include at least one transmitter 148.
[0051] In some demonstrative embodiments, radio 114 and/or radio 144, transmitters 118 and/or 148, and/or receivers 116 and/or 146 may include circuitry; logic; Radio Frequency (RF) elements, circuitry and/or logic; baseband elements, circuitry and/or logic; modulation elements, circuitry and/or logic; demodulation elements, circuitry and/or logic; amplifiers; analog to digital and/or digital to analog converters; filters; and/or the like. For example, radio 114 and/or radio 144 may include or may be implemented as part of a wireless Network Interface Card (NIC), and the like.
[0052] In some demonstrative embodiments, radios 114 and/or 144 may be configured to communicate over a directional band, for example, an mmWave band, and/or any other band, for example, a 2.4GHz band, a 5 GHz band, a S1G band, and/or any other band.
[0053] In some demonstrative embodiments, radios 114 and/or 144 may include, or may be associated with one or more, e.g., a plurality of, directional antennas.
[0054] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 may include one or more, e.g., a plurality of, directional antennas 107, and/or device 140 may include on or more, e.g., a plurality of, directional antennas 147.
[0055] Antennas 107 and/or 147 may include any type of antennas suitable for transmitting and/or receiving wireless communication signals, blocks, frames, transmission streams, packets, messages and/or data. For example, antennas 107 and/or 147 may include any suitable configuration, structure and/or arrangement of one or more antenna elements, components, units, assemblies and/or arrays. Antennas 107 and/or 147 may include, for example, antennas suitable for directional communication, e.g., using beamforming techniques. For example, antennas 107 and/or 147 may include a phased array antenna, a multiple element antenna, a set of switched beam antennas, and/or the like. In some embodiments, antennas 107 and/or 147 may implement transmit and receive functionalities using separate transmit and receive antenna elements. In some embodiments, antennas 107 and/or 147 may implement transmit and receive functionalities using common and/or integrated transmit/receive elements.
[0056] In some demonstrative embodiments, antennas 107 and/or 147 may include directional antennas, which may be steered to one or more beam directions. For example, antennas 107 may be steered to one or more beam directions 135, and/or antennas 147 may be steered to one or more beam directions 145.
[0057] In some demonstrative embodiments, antennas 107 and/or 147 may include and/or may be implemented as part of a single Phased Antenna Array (PA A).
[0058] In some demonstrative embodiments, antennas 107 and/or 147 may be implemented as part of a plurality of PAAs, for example, as a plurality of physically independent PAAs.
[0059] In some demonstrative embodiments, a PAA may include, for example, a rectangular geometry, e.g., including an integer number, denoted M, of rows, and an integer number, denoted N, of columns. In other embodiments, any other types of antennas and/or antenna arrays may be used.
[0060] In some demonstrative embodiments, antennas 107 and/or antennas 147 may be connected to, and/or associated with, one or more Radio Frequency (RF) chains.
[0061] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 may include a controller 124, and/or device 140 may include a controller 154. Controller 124 may be configured to perform and/or to trigger, cause, instruct and/or control device 102 to perform, one or more communications, to generate and/or communicate one or more messages and/or transmissions, and/or to perform one or more functionalities, operations and/or procedures between devices 102, 140 and/or one or more other devices; and/or controller 154 may be configured to perform, and/or to trigger, cause, instruct and/or control device 140 to perform, one or more communications, to generate and/or communicate one or more messages and/or transmissions, and/or to perform one or more functionalities, operations and/or procedures between devices 102, 140 and/or one or more other devices, e.g., as described below.
[0062] In some demonstrative embodiments, controllers 124 and/or 154 may include, or may be implemented, partially or entirely, by circuitry and/or logic, e.g., one or more processors including circuitry and/or logic, memory circuitry and/or logic, Media- Access Control (MAC) circuitry and/or logic, Physical Layer (PHY) circuitry and/or logic, baseband (BB) circuitry and/or logic, a BB processor, a BB memory, Application Processor (AP) circuitry and/or logic, an AP processor, an AP memory, and/or any other circuitry and/or logic, configured to perform the functionality of controllers 124 and/or 154, respectively. Additionally or alternatively, one or more functionalities of controllers 124 and/or 154 may be implemented by logic, which may be executed by a machine and/or one or more processors, e.g., as described below.
[0063] In one example, controller 124 may include circuitry and/or logic, for example, one or more processors including circuitry and/or logic, to cause, trigger and/or control a wireless device, e.g., device 102, and/or a wireless station, e.g., a wireless STA implemented by device 102, to perform one or more operations, communications and/or functionalities, e.g., as described herein.
[0064] In one example, controller 154 may include circuitry and/or logic, for example, one or more processors including circuitry and/or logic, to cause, trigger and/or control a wireless device, e.g., device 140, and/or a wireless station, e.g., a wireless STA implemented by device 140, to perform one or more operations, communications and/or functionalities, e.g., as described herein.
[0065] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 may include a message processor 128 configured to generate, process and/or access one or messages communicated by device 102.
[0066] In one example, message processor 128 may be configured to generate one or more messages to be transmitted by device 102, and/or message processor 128 may be configured to access and/or to process one or more messages received by device 102, e.g., as described below.
[0067] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 140 may include a message processor 158 configured to generate, process and/or access one or messages communicated by device 140.
[0068] In one example, message processor 158 may be configured to generate one or more messages to be transmitted by device 140, and/or message processor 158 may be configured to access and/or to process one or more messages received by device 140, e.g., as described below.
[0069] In some demonstrative embodiments, message processors 128 and/or 158 may include, or may be implemented, partially or entirely, by circuitry and/or logic, e.g., one or more processors including circuitry and/or logic, memory circuitry and/or logic, MAC circuitry and/or logic, PHY circuitry and/or logic, BB circuitry and/or logic, a BB processor, a BB memory, AP circuitry and/or logic, an AP processor, an AP memory, and/or any other circuitry and/or logic, configured to perform the functionality of message processors 128 and/or 158, respectively. Additionally or alternatively, one or more functionalities of message processors 128 and/or 158 may be implemented by logic, which may be executed by a machine and/or one or more processors, e.g., as described below.
[0070] In some demonstrative embodiments, at least part of the functionality of message processor 128 may be implemented as part of radio 114, and/or at least part of the functionality of message processor 158 may be implemented as part of radio 144.
[0071] In some demonstrative embodiments, at least part of the functionality of message processor 128 may be implemented as part of controller 124, and/or at least part of the functionality of message processor 158 may be implemented as part of controller 154.
[0072] In other embodiments, the functionality of message processor 128 may be implemented as part of any other element of device 102, and/or the functionality of message processor 158 may be implemented as part of any other element of device 140. [0073] In some demonstrative embodiments, at least part of the functionality of controller 124 and/or message processor 128 may be implemented by an integrated circuit, for example, a chip, e.g., a System on Chip (SoC). In one example, the chip or SoC may be configured to perform one or more functionalities of radio 114. For example, the chip or SoC may include one or more elements of controller 124, one or more elements of message processor 128, and/or one or more elements of radio 114. In one example, controller 124, message processor 128, and radio 114 may be implemented as part of the chip or SoC.
[0074] In other embodiments, controller 124, message processor 128 and/or radio 114 may be implemented by one or more additional or alternative elements of device 102.
[0075] In some demonstrative embodiments, at least part of the functionality of controller 154 and/or message processor 158 may be implemented by an integrated circuit, for example, a chip, e.g., a SoC. In one example, the chip or SoC may be configured to perform one or more functionalities of radio 144. For example, the chip or SoC may include one or more elements of controller 154, one or more elements of message processor 158, and/or one or more elements of radio 144. In one example, controller 154, message processor 158, and radio 144 may be implemented as part of the chip or SoC.
[0076] In other embodiments, controller 154, message processor 158 and/or radio 144 may be implemented by one or more additional or alternative elements of device 140.
[0077] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 and/or device 140 may include, operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, one or more STAs. For example, device 102 may include at least one STA, and/or device 140 may include at least one STA.
[0078] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 and/or device 140 may include, operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, one or more DMG STAs. For example, device 102 may include, operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, at least one DMG STA, and/or device 140 may include, operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, at least one DMG STA. [0079] In other embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may include, operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, any other wireless device and/or station, e.g., a WLAN STA, a WiFi STA, and the like.
[0080] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 and/or device 140 may be configured operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, an access point (AP), e.g., a DMG AP, and/or a personal basic service set (PBSS) control point (PCP), e.g., a DMG PCP, for example, an AP/PCP STA, e.g., a DMG AP/PCP STA.
[0081] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 and/or device 140 may be configured to operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, a non-AP STA, e.g., a DMG non-AP STA, and/or a non-PCP STA, e.g., a DMG non-PCP STA, for example, a non-AP/PCP STA, e.g., a DMG non- AP/PCP STA.
[0082] In other embodiments, device 102 and/or device 140 may operate as, perform the role of, and/or perform one or more functionalities of, any other additional or alternative device and/or station.
[0083] In one example, a station (STA) may include a logical entity that is a singly addressable instance of a medium access control (MAC) and physical layer (PHY) interface to the wireless medium (WM). The STA may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
[0084] In one example, an AP may include an entity that contains a station (STA), e.g., one STA, and provides access to distribution services, via the wireless medium (WM) for associated STAs. The AP may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
[0085] In one example, a personal basic service set (PBSS) control point (PCP) may include an entity that contains a STA, e.g., one station (STA), and coordinates access to the wireless medium (WM) by STAs that are members of a PBSS. The PCP may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
[0086] In one example, a PBSS may include a directional multi-gigabit (DMG) basic service set (BSS) that includes, for example, one PBSS control point (PCP). For example, access to a distribution system (DS) may not be present, but, for example, an intra-PBSS forwarding service may optionally be present. [0087] In one example, a PCP/AP STA may include a station (STA) that is at least one of a PCP or an AP. The PCP/AP STA may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
[0088] In one example, a non-AP STA may include a STA that is not contained within an AP. The non-AP STA may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
[0089] In one example, a non-PCP STA may include a STA that is not a PCP. The non-PCP STA may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
[0090] In one example, a non PCP/AP STA may include a STA that is not a PCP and that is not an AP. The non-PCP/ AP STA may perform any other additional or alternative functionality.
[0091] In some demonstrative embodiments devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to communicate over a Next Generation 60 GHz (NG60) network, an Enhanced DMG (EDMG) network, and/or any other network. For example, devices 102 and/or 140 may perform Multiple-Input- Multiple-Output (MIMO) communication, for example, for communicating over the NG60 and/or EDMG networks, e.g., over an NG60 or an EDMG frequency band.
[0092] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to operate in accordance with one or more Specifications, for example, including one or more IEEE 802.11 Specifications, e.g., an IEEE 802.11-2016 Specification, an IEEE 802.11 ay Specification, and/or any other specification and/or protocol.
[0093] Some demonstrative embodiments may be implemented, for example, as part of a new standard in an mmWave band, e.g., a 60GHz frequency band or any other directional band, for example, as an evolution of an IEEE 802.11-2016 Specification and/or an IEEE 802.1 lad Specification.
[0094] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured according to one or more standards, for example, in accordance with an IEEE 802.11 ay Standard, which may be, for example, configured to enhance the efficiency and/or performance of an IEEE 802.1 lad Specification, which may be configured to provide Wi-Fi connectivity in a 60 GHz band. [0095] Some demonstrative embodiments may enable, for example, to significantly increase the data transmission rates defined in the IEEE 802.1 lad Specification, for example, from 7 Gigabit per second (Gbps), e.g., up to 30 Gbps, or to any other data rate, which may, for example, satisfy growing demand in network capacity for new coming applications.
[0096] Some demonstrative embodiments may be implemented, for example, to allow increasing a transmission data rate, for example, by applying MIMO and/or channel bonding techniques.
[0097] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to communicate MIMO communications over the mmWave wireless communication band.
[0098] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 and/or device 140 may be configured to support one or more mechanisms and/or features, for example, channel bonding, Single User (SU) MIMO, and/or Multi-User (MU) MIMO, for example, in accordance with an IEEE 802.1 lay Standard and/or any other standard and/or protocol.
[0099] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 and/or device 140 may include, operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform the functionality of, one or more EDMG STAs. For example, device 102 may include, operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform the functionality of, at least one EDMG STA, and/or device 140 may include, operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform the functionality of, at least one EDMG STA.
[00100] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may implement a communication scheme, which may include Physical layer (PHY) and/or Media Access Control (MAC) layer schemes, for example, to support one or more applications, and/or increased transmission data rates, e.g., data rates of up to 30 Gbps, or any other data rate.
[00101] In some demonstrative embodiments, the PHY and/or MAC layer schemes may be configured to support frequency channel bonding over a mmWave band, e.g., over a 60 GHz band, SU MIMO techniques, and/or MU MIMO techniques.
[00102] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to implement one or more mechanisms, which may be configured to enable SU and/or MU communication of Downlink (DL) and/or Uplink frames (UL) using a MIMO scheme.
[00103] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 and/or device 140 may be configured to implement one or more MU communication mechanisms. For example, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to implement one or more MU mechanisms, which may be configured to enable MU communication of DL frames using a MIMO scheme, for example, between a device, e.g., device 102, and a plurality of devices, e.g., including device 140 and/or one or more other devices.
[00104] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to communicate over an NG60 network, an EDMG network, and/or any other network and/or any other frequency band. For example, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to communicate DL MIMO transmissions and/or UL MIMO transmissions, for example, for communicating over the NG60 and/or EDMG networks.
[00105] Some wireless communication Specifications, for example, the IEEE 802.1 lad-2012 Specification, may be configured to support a SU system, in which a STA may transmit frames to a single STA at a time. Such Specifications may not be able, for example, to support a STA transmitting to multiple STAs simultaneously, for example, using a MU-MIMO scheme, e.g., a DL MU-MIMO, or any other MU scheme.
[00106] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to communicate over a channel bandwidth, e.g., of at least 2.16GHz, in a frequency band above 45GHz.
[00107] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to implement one or more mechanisms, which may, for example, enable to extend a single-channel BW scheme, e.g., a scheme in accordance with the IEEE 802.1 lad Specification or any other scheme, for higher data rates and/or increased capabilities, e.g., as described below.
[00108] In one example, the single-channel BW scheme may include communication over a 2.16 GHz channel (also referred to as a "single-channel" or a "DMG channel"). [00109] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to implement one or more channel bonding mechanisms, which may, for example, support communication over a channel BW (also referred to as a "wide channel", an "EDMG channel", or a "bonded channel") including two or more channels, e.g., two or more 2.16 GHz channels, e.g., as described below .
[00110] In some demonstrative embodiments, the channel bonding mechanisms may include, for example, a mechanism and/or an operation whereby two or more channels, e.g., 2.16 GHz channels, can be combined, e.g., for a higher bandwidth of packet transmission, for example, to enable achieving higher data rates, e.g., when compared to transmissions over a single channel. Some demonstrative embodiments are described herein with respect to communication over a channel BW including two or more 2.16 GHz channels, however other embodiments may be implemented with respect to communications over a channel bandwidth, e.g., a "wide" channel, including or formed by any other number of two or more channels, for example, an aggregated channel including an aggregation of two or more channels.
[00111] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 and/or device 140 may be configured to implement one or more channel bonding mechanisms, which may, for example, support an increased channel bandwidth, for example, a channel BW of 4.32 GHz, a channel BW of 6.48 GHz, a channel BW of 8.64 GHz, and/or any other additional or alternative channel BW, e.g., as described below.
[00112] In some demonstrative embodiments, a distinctive feature of wireless systems operating in a directional frequency band, e.g., frequencies above 45 GHz, is a beamforming mechanism, e.g., a directional transmission and/or reception, which may be implemented, for example, to offset a large free-space path loss of millimeter- wave transmissions, e.g., according to the Friis transmission Law.
[00113] In some demonstrative embodiments, beamforming training mechanisms, e.g., in compliance with an IEEE 802.1 lad Specification, may be used by a pair of stations to determine appropriate antenna settings, e.g., for transmission and/or reception.
[00114] In some demonstrative embodiments, a beamforming training procedure may include, for example, a sector-level sweep (SLS), which may be mandatory, during which transmit beamforming training, e.g., coarse training, may be performed. [00115] In some demonstrative embodiments, the beamforming training procedure, e.g., in compliance with the IEEE 802.1 lad Specification, may include a Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) phase, e.g., after the SLS, which may be optional, and which may enable to perform receive beamforming training, and/or an iterative refinement of antenna weight vectors (AWVs), e.g., of a transmitter and/or receiver at one or both stations.
[00116] In one example, the SLS may include a "packetized" beamforming, for example, in which an entire packet may be transmitted, e.g., with a given TX/RX Antenna Weight Vector (AWV) settings. For example, the SLS may operate with a discrete set of AWVs including a codebook and covering a spatial sector, e.g., a subspace, of a particular interest.
[00117] In one example, the BRP may include an "in-packet" training, for example, in which an AWV switching may be performed, for example, during a same, e.g., single, packet transmission. The AWV switching may be performed, for example, during a packet postamble transmission, which may include training (TRN) subfields grouped into TRN units. For example, in contrast to the SLS, the BRP protocol may use arbitrary AWVs, for example, while not being limited to the given set of AWVs defined by the codebook design. In one example, a limitation on the BRP, e.g., the only limitation, may be based on a phase discretization accuracy of the AWV.
[00118] A beamforming training procedure, for example, in compliance with an IEEE 802.1 lad Specification, may assume that an SLS training phase is performed first to acquire an initial, e.g., coarse, TX/RX AWV settings defined in the codebook, and the BRP may be performed based on the results of the SLS phase, for example, to refine the initial AWV settings.
[00119] One technical disadvantage of the SLS training, e.g., in compliance with an IEEE 802.11 ad Specification, is a significant time overhead caused by an entire packet transmission allocated for a given AWV setting.
[00120] In some demonstrative embodiments, a transmission, e.g., a MIMO transmission, may be performed by a station (STA), e.g., device 102 and/or device 140, which may be, for example, equipped with multiple antennas and/or Phased Antenna Arrays (PAAs). In one example, a PAA, e.g., even each PAA, may be equipped with multiple Sub Arrays (SAs) (also referred to as "sectors" or "antenna sectors"), which may, for example, operate successively or concurrently in time.
[00121] For example, antennas 107 and/or 147 may include multiple antennas and/or PAAs. A PAA of the PAAs, e.g., each PAA, may include a plurality of SAs, which may operate successively or concurrently in time.
[00122] In some demonstrative embodiments, application of the "packetized" SLS protocol with a multi antenna STA or multi SAs STA, e.g., for a MIMO transmission, may cause a technical problem, for example, in the form of a significant time overhead.
[00123] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of a beamforming procedure, which may allow, for example, to at least provide a technical solution for SLS, and/or one or more additional or alternative benefits, e.g., as described below.
[00124] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of an SLS beamforming procedure, which may allow, for example, to significantly reduce a time overhead of the SLS beamforming procedure, e.g., as described below.
[00125] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of a fast SLS beamforming protocol, e.g., as described below.
[00126] Some demonstrative embodiments described herein may refer to some operations as a "fast SLS beamforming protocol". However, this terminology is not limiting, and, in other embodiments, some or all of the operations described herein may be performed as part of any additional or alternative procedure or protocol.
[00127] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of one or more additional or alternative procedures and/or protocols, e.g., to implement some or all of the operations described herein, and/or to implement additional, and/or alternative operations and/or procedures.
[00128] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of a beamforming training protocol (also referred to as "SLS-over-TRN" or "SLS-over-BRP" beamforming training), which may be, for example, based on an "in-packet" training protocol, which may be suitable for STAs with multi antennas and/or multi SAs, e.g., as described below.
[00129] In some demonstrative embodiments, the "SLS-over-TRN" beamforming training may utilize one or more TRN units to perform an SLS, for example, similar to a BRP, for example, while, in one non-limiting example, the "SLS-over-TRN" and/or "SLS-over-BRP" beamforming training may still be limited to an AWV set defined by the codebook.
[00130] In some demonstrative embodiments, the beamforming protocol may be configured to use a TRN unit structure, e.g., in compliance with a BRP frame structure, e.g., as described below.
[00131] In other embodiments, any other TRN unit structure and/or frame structure may be used.
[00132] In some demonstrative embodiments, the beamforming protocol may redefine a behavior of a transmitter side and/or a receiver side during communication of one or more, for example, some or all, subfields of a packet, e.g., as described below.
[00133] In some demonstrative embodiments, the beamforming protocol may be configured to allow PAA switching and/or SA switching, for example, even inside a packet, e.g., during communication of one or more fields of the packet, for example, while allowing to meet one or more practical requirements for given time values, e.g., as described below.
[00134] In some demonstrative embodiments, the beamforming protocol may be implemented for SISO beamforming training, MIMO beamforming training, and/or SISO and/or MIMO beamforming training, for example, with any suitable channel bonding factor, e.g., as described before.
[00135] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations in accordance with a beamforming training protocol or procedure, which may be configured, for example, to use a TRN structure, for example, a BRP TRN structure, to perform SLS beamforming "in- packet" training, e.g., as described below. [00136] In some demonstrative embodiments, a functionality of one or more, e.g., some or all, training fields of a BRP packet may be configured, e.g., redefined, for example, at least to support switching of antennas and/or subarrays, for example, which may not be supported by an IEEE 802. Had Specification, e.g., as described below.
[00137] In some demonstrative embodiments, the beamforming protocol may implement one or more operations, for example, based on the BRP concept described above, for example, for "in-packet" training, e.g., rather than "packetized" BF, for example, during an SLS, as described below.
[00138] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of the beamforming protocol described herein may provide one or more technical advantages, for example, by allowing a very efficient BF flow, for example, at least in terms of time consumption and/or any other parameter, which may be important or critical, in some cases, for example, for STAs equipped with multiple antennas and/or subarrays, e.g., devices 102 and/or 140.
[00139] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of the beamforming protocol described herein may provide one or more technical advantages, for example, by exploiting a TRN structure for BRP, e.g., as described below.
[00140] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to generate, process and/or communicate one or more TRN units, e.g., TRN Transmit (TRN-T) and/or TRN-Receive (TRN-R) units (TRN-T/R Units), for example, as part of one or more communications of a beamforming procedure, e.g., as described below.
[00141] In some demonstrative embodiments, a packet structure, for example, in compliance with a BRP packet structure or any other packet structure, may include one or more TRN units. In one example, the packet structure may comply with a BRP packet postamble structure, or any other packet structure, which may include a plurality of, e.g., a number of, TRN units.
[00142] In some demonstrative embodiments, a TRN unit, e.g., each TRN unit, may be defined as a group of N TRN subfields. [00143] In some demonstrative embodiments, a TRN subfield, e.g., each TRN subfield, may train an AWV, e.g., a single AWV, of an antenna.
[00144] In some demonstrative embodiments, a TRN unit may be implemented as a TRN transmit (TRN-T) unit, which may be applied for transmit training, or as a TRN receive (TRN-R) unit, which may be applied for receive training, e.g., as described below.
[00145] In one example, the TRN-T/R units may be configured to have an identical sequence definition.
[00146] Reference is made to Fig. 2, which schematically illustrates a TRN unit 200, which may be implemented in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[00147] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 (Fig. 1) and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may be configured to generate, transmit, receive and/or process one or more frames, packets and/or transmissions, for example, one or more Physical Layer Protocol Data Units (PPDUs), e.g., EDMG PPDUs, for example, including one or more BRP packets, e.g., EDMG packets, which may include one or more TRN units 200, for example, during a beamforming training procedure, e.g., as described below.
[00148] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 2, TRN unit 200 may include a plurality of TRN subfields 217.
[00149] In some demonstrative embodiments, a TRN subfield 217, e.g., a single TRN subfield, of TRN unit 200 may be defined using 6 Golay complementary sequences 214, e.g., including Ga½ and/or Gb^ Golay complementary sequences.
[00150] In other embodiments, TRN subfield 213 may include any other number and/or type of sequences.
[00151] In one example, a sequence length, denoted N, of a Golay complementary sequence 214 may depend on one or more parameters, e.g., including a channel boding factor, denoted NCB, and/or any other additional or alternative parameter.
[00152] In some demonstrative embodiments, the Sequence length N of a Golay sequence 214 may be defined as N = 128 * NCB, where NCB = 1, 2, 3 or 4. In other embodiments, the Sequence length N may be defined for any other channel bonding factor and/or in any other manner. [00153] In some demonstrative embodiments, a station may be allowed to switch an AWV of an antenna, for example, during a time period of a first half of a Ga½ sequence 215, e.g., 36.3636 nanoseconds (ns). Accordingly, the AWV may be required to be stabilized during this time period.
[00154] In one example, different AWVs of the antenna may be trained, for example, for different TRN subfields in the TRN unit 200. For example, a first AWV of the antenna may be trained during a TRN subfield 212, and/or a second AWV of the antenna may be trained during a TRN subfield 213
[00155] Referring back to Fig.l, in some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to utilize TRN units, e.g., TRN unit 200 (Fig. 2), according to a definition of the TRN Units, which may be configured, and/or redefined, for example, to support an SLS-over-TRN beamforming procedure, e.g., as described below.
[00156] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, to support SLS training using TRN units with multiple PAAs/SAs, a TRN unit structure, e.g., TRN Unit 200 (Fig. 2), and/or a TRN subfield structure, e.g., TRN subfield 217 (Fig. 2), may be maintained.
[00157] In some demonstrative embodiments, a TX/RX behavior may be changed during transmission of one or more, e.g., some or all, fields of TRN unit 200 (Fig. 2), for example, to allow a PAA and/or a SA switching, e.g., as described below.
[00158] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more time intervals may be configured to allow switching a PAA and/or a SA, for example, with respect to a practical system evaluation, e.g., as follows:
1. Antenna Switching Time (AST): 3 microseconds (us), e.g.,. between switching from a first antenna, e.g., a first PAA, to a second antenna, e.g., a second PAA; and/or
2. Sub Array Switching Time (SST): 0.5 us, e.g., for switching between a first SA and a second SA, e.g., of a same PAA.
[00159] In other embodiments, any other time intervals may be used. [00160] In some demonstrative embodiments, a single TRN subfield, e.g., TRN subfield 217 (Fig. 2), may have 6*128 chips (samples), which may result in a duration of 0.436us, or any other duration.
[00161] In some demonstrative embodiments, a single TRN unit, e.g., TRN unit 200 (Fig. 2), may have 6*128*N chips, which may result in a duration of 4.36us, for example, under an assumption of N=10, or any other duration.
[00162] In some demonstrative embodiments, a particular choice of one or more intervals to switch an antenna, e.g., to switch from one PAA to anther PAA, may be determined, for example, to be less than or equal to the duration of a single TRN unit, for example, a duration of TRN unit 200 (Fig. 2), e.g., as described below. In other embodiments, the intervals to switch an antenna may ne configured to have a longer time, e.g., longer than a duration of one TRN unit.
[00163] In some demonstrative embodiments, a particular choice of one or more intervals to switch a SA may be determined to be less than or equal to two TRN subfields, for example, a duration of TRN subfields 212 and 213 (Fig. 2). In other embodiments, the intervals to switch an SA may ne configured to have any other duration, e.g., longer than a duration of two TRN subfields.
[00164] In other embodiments, this particular choice of time intervals is not limiting and any other first number, denoted Nl, of TRN units may be allocated to switch an antenna, e.g., a PAA; and/or any other second number, denoted N2, of TRN subfields may be allocated to switch a SA.
[00165] In some demonstrative embodiments, switching of a PAA may be allowed, for example, only once per a TRN field of a BRP frame, or with a periodicity of some period in time, denoted PI, for example, multiple times over the BRP frame, e.g., as described below.
[00166] In other embodiments, switching of the PAA may be allowed according to any other additional or alternative criteria.
[00167] In some demonstrative embodiments, switching of an SA may be allowed per each TRN unit, e.g., TRN unit 200 (Fig. 2), or per group of TRN units, e.g., with a periodicity of some period in time, denoted P2, e.g., as described below. [00168] In other embodiments, switching of the SA may be allowed according to any other additional or alternative criteria.
[00169] In some demonstrative embodiments, a transmitted signal, e.g., during one or more of the transition time intervals defined above, may not be meaningful for Tx and/or Rx, and/or may not be used for signal estimations.
[00170] In other embodiments, the transmitted signal, e.g., during one or more of the transition time intervals defined above, may be used for one or more purposes.
[00171] In some demonstrative embodiments, signaling of a changed functionality for transition intervals may be supported, for example, in a header of a frame, for example, an EDMG-Header-A of an EDMG PPDU, and/or any other field or subfield of the frame.
[00172] In one example, a value, for example, 1 bit or any other number of bits, may be defined, for example, in a header or any other field of a BRP PPDU, to indicate that a BRP part of the PPDU is to include TRN units and/or TRN subfields with redefined functionality, e.g., as described herein.
[00173] In another example, more than 1 bit may be allocated, for example, to several configurations with redefined functionality. For example, a first value may be configured to indicate a first configuration and/or functionality to be applied to one or more TRN units and/or subfields, and/or a second value may be configured to indicate a second, different, configuration and/or functionality to be applied to one or more TRN units and/or subfields.
[00174] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform beamforming training, for example, according to one or more operations of, e.g., by implementing some or all of the operations of, an SLS-over- TRN Beamforming Flow, e.g., as described below.
[00175] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-over-TRN (SLS-over-BRP) beamforming may be configured to support a transmit sector sweep (TxSS) protocol, e.g., to train a Transmit (Tx) AWV; and/or a receive sector sweep (RxSS) protocol, e.g., to train a receive (RX) AWV, e.g., as described below.
[00176] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-over-TRN (SLS-over-BRP) beamforming may allow training between a pair of STAs, e.g., including a STA, e.g., device 102, performing a role of an initiator, and/or a STA, e.g., device 140, performing a role of a responder STA. For example, the initiator may start the training by sending a training request, and the responder may reply to the training request.
[00177] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-over-TRN (SLS-over-BRP) beamforming may be initiated, for example, by sending a GRANT frame by the initiator, and receiving a GRANT ACK frame by the responder, e.g., as described below. In other embodiments, this stage may be skipped if desired.
[00178] In other embodiments, the SLS-over-TRN flow may be initiated in any other manner and/or using any other additional or alternative communications.
[00179] In some demonstrative embodiments, an SLS, e.g., the SLS-over-TRN, may be divided into 2 phases, for example, including an Initiator Training Interval (ITI), and a Responder Training Interval (RTI), e.g., as described below.
[00180] In one example, the ITI and RTI may be used, for example, as counterparts of an Initiator Sector Sweep (ISS) phase and/or a Responder Sector Sweep (RSS) phase of an SLS.
[00181] In some demonstrative embodiments, first and a second EDMG STAs, e.g., devices 102 and 140, may be configured to perform a beamforming Training Interval (TI), e.g., as part of an SLS-over-TRN (SLS-over-BRP) beamforming procedure, e.g., as described below.
[00182] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, the TI may include a TxSS sub-phase, an RxSS sub-phase, e.g., following the TxSS sub-phase, e.g., as described below.
[00183] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first and a second EDMG STAs, e.g., devices 102 and/or 140, may be configured to perform the TxSS sub-phase of TI, e.g., as described below.
[00184] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may include a beamforming initiator and the second EDMG STA may include a beamforming responder, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of an initiator TI, e.g., as described below.
[00185] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may include a beamforming responder and the second EDMG STA may include a beamforming initiator, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of a responder TI, e.g., as described below.
[00186] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the beamforming initiator, and/or controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the beamforming responder.
[00187] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the first EDMG STA, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of an initiator TI.
[00188] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, controller 124 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the second EDMG STA, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of a responder TI.
[00189] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the second EDMG STA, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of an initiator TI.
[00190] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, controller 154 may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 to operate as, perform a role of, and/or perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of, the first EDMG STA, for example, when performing the beamforming TI as part of a responder TI.
[00191] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit to the second EDMG STA a plurality of BRP packets, which may be configured, for example, to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00192] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 GHz, e.g., as described below. [00193] In some demonstrative embodiments, the transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets may include a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of the BRP packet, e.g., as described below.
[00194] In some demonstrative embodiments, the transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets may include transmission of a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00195] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to transmit the preamble and the data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via the same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00196] In some demonstrative embodiments, the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the plurality BRP packets from the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, for example, by receiving, e.g.,, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, the preamble and the data field of the BRP packet, for example, via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the second EDMG STA, and/or by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA at an omnidirectional ("omni") configuration, for example, to receive one or more TRN subfields in the TRN field of the BRP packet, e.g., as described below.
[00197] In some demonstrative embodiments, the second EDMG STA may be configured to receive the plurality of BRP packets over the channel bandwidth in the frequency band above 45 GHz, e.g., as described below.
[00198] In some demonstrative embodiments, the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, for example, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA, transmit a feedback to the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00199] In some demonstrative embodiments, the feedback to the first EDMG STA may indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below. For example, the second EDMG STA may be configured to determine the selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the second EDMG STA, for example, based on the TRN units of the BRP packets of TxSS sub-phase.
[00200] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, for example, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receive the feedback from the second EDMG STA. For example, the feedback from the second EDMG STA may indicate the selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00201] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, repeat the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, for example, based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00202] In some demonstrative embodiments, the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, repeat the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA, for example, based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00203] In some demonstrative embodiments, the plurality of BRP packets may include a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame- Space (IFS), e.g., as described below.
[00204] In some demonstrative embodiments, the feedback may be separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS, e.g., as described below.
[00205] In some demonstrative embodiments, repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI may be separated from one another by a third IFS, e.g., as described below.
[00206] In other embodiments, any other additional or alternative IFSs may be utilized.
[00207] In some demonstrative embodiments, the TRN subfields of the TRN field in the BRP packet may correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00208] In some demonstrative embodiments, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the first EDMG STA may include TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field, e.g., as described below.
[00209] In some demonstrative embodiments, the at least one first TRN unit in the TRN filed may include a single TRN unit, e.g., as described below.
[00210] In some demonstrative embodiments, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the first EDMG STA may include TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
[00211] In some demonstrative embodiments, the TxSS of the antenna may begin only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field of the BRP packet, e.g., as described below.
[00212] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to begin the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field, e.g., as described below.
[00213] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to switch to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit, e.g., as describe below.
[00214] In some demonstrative embodiments, the second EDMG STA may be configured to switch to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the second EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet, e.g., as described below.
[00215] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to switch between a plurality of AWVs of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field, e.g., as described below.
[00216] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to switch between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet, e.g., as described below.
[00217] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to , during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, perform a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets, e.g., as described below. [00218] In some demonstrative embodiments, the second EDMG STA may transmit a feedback to the first EDMG STA, for example, during each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase, e.g., as described below.
[00219] In some demonstrative embodiments, the second EDMG STA may be configured to transmit the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the second EDMG STA, for example, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
[00220] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to receive the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, for example, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
[00221] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first and the second EDMG STAs, e.g., devices 102 and 140, may be configured to perform a receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
[00222] In some demonstrative embodiments, the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit a plurality of BRP packets from the second EDMG STA to the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00223] In some demonstrative embodiments, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the second EDMG STA may be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00224] In some demonstrative embodiments, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the second EDMG STA may be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00225] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over the TRN field of the BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets from the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00226] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, repeat the RxSS, for example, based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00227] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00228] In some demonstrative embodiments, the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the acknowledgement from the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00229] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, switch between a plurality of AWVs of the Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets from the second EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00230] In some demonstrative embodiments, the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI may be repeated, e.g., based on the count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, for example, to enable training of all RX antennas of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00231] In some demonstrative embodiments, the first EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, for example, based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00232] In some demonstrative embodiments, the second EDMG STA may be configured to, during the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, for example, based on the count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, e.g., as described below.
[00233] In some demonstrative embodiments, the beamforming TI may include an Initiator TI (ITI). According to these embodiments, the first EDMG STA may include an initiator STA, and/or the second EDMG STA may include a responder STA. For example, one or more of the operations, e.g., all operations, described above with respect to the first EDMG STA, may be performed by the initiator STA, and/or one or more of the operations, e.g., all operations, described above with respect to the second EDMG STA, may be performed by the responder STA for example, when the beamforming TI includes the ITI.
[00234] In some demonstrative embodiments, the beamforming TI may include a responder TI (RTI). According to these embodiments, the first EDMG STA may include the responder STA, and/or the second EDMG STA may include the initiator STA. For example, one or more of the operations, e.g., all operations, described above with respect to the first EDMG STA, may be performed by the responder STA, and/or one or more of the operations, e.g., all operations, described above with respect to the second EDMG STA, may be performed by the initiator STA, for example, when the beamforming TI includes the RTI.
[00235] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 102 may include, perform one or more operations of, and/or perform the functionality of the initiator STA, e.g., during an ITI or an RTI.
[00236] In some demonstrative embodiments, device 140 may include, perform one or more operations of, and/or perform the functionality of the responder STA, e.g., during an ITI or an RTI.
[00237] . In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and 140 may be configured to perform an SLS-OVER-TRN, e.g., including a TxSS and/or an RxSS sub phase of the beamforming TI.
[00238] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-OVER-TRN may include an ITI, for example, to train Tx or Rx AWVs of the initiator STA, e.g., device 102.
[00239] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-OVER-TRN may include an RTI, to train Tx or RX AWVs of the responder STA, e.g., device 140.
[00240] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS over TRN may include a TxSS sub phase including an ITI and an RTI, e.g., as described below.
[00241] Reference is made to Fig. 3, which schematically illustrates a Tx beamforming procedure 300, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[00242] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of the beamforming procedure of Fig. 3 may be implemented, e.g., by devices 102 and/or 140, for example, to perform an SLS-over-TRN beamforming flow, e.g., a TxSS sub- phase of the beamforming TI. [00243] In some demonstrative embodiments, beamforming procedure 300 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 300 having N antennas and a responder 340 having M antennas. For example, device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 302, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 340. According to this example, antennas 107 may include N antennas, and/or antennas 147 may include M antennas.
[00244] In one example, the initiator 302 and/or responder 340 may be aware of each other capabilities, for example, based on one or more communication, for example, during a preceding phase of capabilities exchange, for example, during GRANT and GRANT ACK phase, and/or any other phase.
[00245] In some demonstrative embodiments, initiator 302 may perform a repetition of M sub-phases 312, for example, during an ITI interval 310, which may be equal to a total number of M antennas of responder 340. During ITI interval 310, for example, initiator 302 may perform training of its AWVs, and may receive feedbacks from responder 340 on the best sectors of initiator 302, e.g., for TxSS.
[00246] In some demonstrative embodiments, responder 340 may perform a repetition of N sub-phases 332 during an RTI interval 330, which may be equal to the total number of antennas N of initiator 302. During RTI interval 330 , for example, responder 340 may perform training of its AWVs, and may receive feedbacks from initiator 302 on the best sectors, e.g., for TxSS.
[00247] In some demonstrative embodiments, a first Inter-frame space (IFS), denoted IFSl, between two subsequent sub-phases 332 and/or between two subsequent sub- phases 312 t may be defined, for example, as any eligible IFS.
[00248] In some demonstrative embodiments, a second IFS, denoted IFS2, between ITI interval 310 and RTI interval 330 may be defined, for example, as any eligible IFS.
[00249] In one example, the IFSl and/or IFS2 may be defined, for example, to include a Short Beamforming IFS (SBIFS), a Medium Beamforming IFS (MBIFS), a BRP IFS (BRPIFS), and/or any other IFS. The specific definition of the IFSl and/or IFS2 may not be limited to a particular choice of IFS. [00250] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations and/or communications of beamforming procedure 300, e.g., as described below.
[00251] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 3, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to repeat an ITI sub-phase 312 of beamforming procedure 300, for example, based on a count of the M antennas of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described below.
[00252] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 3, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to repeat an RTI sub-phase 332 of beamforming procedure 300, for example, based on a count of the N antennas of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described below.
[00253] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 3, repetitions of RTI sub-phases 332 and/or repetitions of TTI sub-phases 312 of beamforming procedure 300 may be separated from one another by a first IFS, e.g., IFS1.
[00254] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 3, ITI interval 310 and RTI interval 330 of beamforming procedure 300 may be separated from one another by a second IFS, e.g., IFS2.
[00255] Referring back to Fig.l, in some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-over- TRN may implement a frame format, for example, a BRP frame format, e.g., in compliance with a future IEEE 802.1 lay Specification, and/or any other format.
[00256] In some demonstrative embodiments, the BRP frame format may include, for example, a Preamble part , denoted P), a physical layer Service Data Unit (PSDU) part including MAC data, e.g., a data field, and/or a TRN field including one or more TRN units.
[00257] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, the preamble P of an EDMG BRP PPDU may include, for example, one or more fields of a non-EDMG portion of an EDMG PPDU and/or one or more fields of an EDMG portion of the EMDG PPDU.
[00258] For example, the non-EDMG portion may include a non-EDMG (legacy) Short Training Field (STF) (L-STF), a non-EDMG (Legacy) Channel Estimation Field (CEF) (L-CEF), and/or a non-EDMG header (L-header). For example, the EDMG portion of the EDMG PPDU may include one or more EDMG preamble fields, a data field, and a TRN field. The one or more EDMG preamble fields may include, for example, one or more of a first EDMG header, e.g., an EDMG-Header-A, an EDMG-STF, an EDMG-CEF, and/or a second EDMG header, e.g., an EDMG- Header-B.
[00259] In one example, the preamble P of an EDMG BRP PPDU may include, for example, at least the non-EDMG portion, and the EDMG-Header-A. In other embodiments, the preamble P may include any other additional or alternative fields.
[00260] In some demonstrative embodiments, a transmission of the BRP frame may be performed over a number of NCB 2.16 GHz channels, where NCB = 1, 2, 3 or 4, or any other channel bonding factor. In other embodiments, the BRP frame may include only some of these parts, may include additional or alternative parts, and/or may be transmitted according to any other channel bonding factor, and/or in any other form.
[00261] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-over-TRN may implement one or more BRP frame format types, e.g., as described below.
[00262] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-over-TRN may include a first frame format, in which the preamble P and the PSDU may be transmitted in a duplicate mode, and there may be no TRN field appended at an end of the BRP frame.
[00263] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-over-TRN may implement a second frame format, in which a legacy part (non-EDMG) of the preamble part P may be transmitted in a duplicate mode, an EDMG part of the preamble P and the PSDU may be transmitted in a bonded mode over a bonded channel, and there may be no TRN field appended at the end of the frame.
[00264] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-over-TRN may implement a third frame format, in which the preamble part P and the PSDU may be transmitted in a duplicate mode, and the TRN field may be transmitted in a bonded mode over a bonded channel.
[00265] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-over-TRN may implement a fourth frame format, in which a legacy (n on-EDMG) part of the preamble part P may be transmitted in the duplicate mode, and an EDMG part of the preamble part P, the PSDU, and the TRN field may be transmitted in a bonded mode over a bonded channel.
[00266] In some demonstrative embodiments, the SLS-over-TRN may implement a fifth frame format, in which the preamble part P, the PSDU, and the TRN field may be transmitted in the duplicate mode.
[00267] In other embodiments, some or all of these frame types formats may be used, one or more of these frame formats may be modified, and/or additional or alternative frame formats may be implemented.
[00268] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more packets of a packet type having a TRN field, e.g., including TRN units, at the end, e.g., according to the third, fourth, and/or fifth frame formats, may be used, for example, for SLS training, e.g., as described below.
[00269] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more packets of a packet type without TRN units appended at the end, e.g., according to the first, and/or second frame formats, may be used, for example, for feedback and/or ACK purposes, e.g., as descried below.
[00270] For example, the packets including the TRN units at the end may be used for SLS training purposes.
[00271] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations and/or communications during an initiator training interval (ITI) of a TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
[00272] Reference is made to Fig. 4, which schematically illustrates an initiator training procedure 400, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[00273] In some demonstrative embodiments, initiator training procedure 400 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 402 having N antennas and a responder 440 having M antennas. For example, device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 402, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 440. According to this example, antennas 107 (Fig. 1) may include N antennas, and/or antennas 147 (Fig. 1) may include M antennas. [00274] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of the Fig. 4 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140, for example, as part of a TxSS-over-TRN training, e.g., with no antenna reciprocity.
[00275] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of the Fig. 4, may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140, for example, as part of a TxSS-over-TRN ITI training sub-phase, for example, for an m"1 antenna of the responder , e.g., wherein m=l...M.
[00276] For example, one or more operations of Fig. 4, may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, during an mth sub-phase 312 (Fig. 3) of ITI interval 310 (Fig. 3).
[00277] For example, the operations of Fig. 4 may be repeated, for example, for M times according to the number M of responder antennas.
[00278] In some demonstrative embodiments, initiator 402 may send N BRP packets 415, e.g., wherein Ν may be equal to a number of antennas of initiator 402.
[00279] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, a BRP frame 415 may include, for example, a preamble part 417, denoted P, a data field 419, e.g., a PSDU, and/or a TRN field 421.
[00280] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, TRN field 421 may include a plurality of TRN units including a first TRN unit 423, followed by a plurality of TRN units 425.
[00281] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, a TRN unit 425 may include a plurality of TRN subfields 427.
[00282] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, the preamble P 417 and/or PSDU 419 may be transmitted and received using antenna settings, which may be, for example, gathered during a previous training of an antenna of initiator 402, or based on any other procedure and/or information.
[00283] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, the first TRN unit 423 may be used for antenna switching and may be defined as a transition interval.
[00284] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more, e.g., all, of the rest of the TRN units 425 may be transmitted using different AWVs, e.g., by performing a sector sweep. [00285] In some demonstrative embodiments, initiator training procedure 400 may allow, for example, SA switching from one TRN unit to another, e.g., by applying the mechanism defined above.
[00286] In some demonstrative embodiments, responder 440 may receive the TRN units of BRP packet 415, for example, while operating in an omnidirectional ("Omni)" mode 433 for an m"1 antenna of responder 440.
[00287] In some demonstrative embodiments, responder 440 may select the best sector per PAA and/or SA of initiator 402, for example, based on one or more measurements corresponding to the TRN units of the BRP packet 415 received by the mth antenna of responder 440.
[00288] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, a feedback frame 424 may be sent by responder 440, for example, to deliver feedbacks on the best sectors for PAA and/or SA of initiator 402 for the mth antenna of responder 440. For example, responder 440 may use antenna settings gathered in a previous training to transmit feedback frame 424 and/or to receive the preamble part 417 and/or PSDU 419 of the BRP packets 415.
[00289] In some demonstrative embodiments, responder 440 may acknowledge the reception of BRP packets 415, e.g., in feedback frame 424.
[00290] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, a first IFS, denoted IFS3, may separate between two subsequent BRP packets 415, and/or a second IFS, denoted IFS4, may separate between a last BRP packet of BRP packets 415 and feedback frame 424.
[00291] In some demonstrative embodiments, the IFS4 and/or the IFS3 may be defined, for example, to include an SB IFS, an MB IFS, a BRPIFS, and/or any other IFS. The specific definition of the IFS3 and/or IFS4 may not be limited to a particular choice of IFS.
[00292] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of the initiator training procedure 400, e.g., as described below.
[00293] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to, during a TxSS sub- phase of an ITI, transmit to device 140 (Fig. 1) the plurality of BRP packets 415 to train antennas 107 (Fig. 1) of device 102 (Fig. 1).
[00294] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to transmit the plurality of BRP packets 415 over a channel bandwidth in the frequency band above 45 GHz.
[00295] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to transmit the preamble 417 and the data field 419 of each of the plurality of BRP packets 415 via the same Tx antenna configuration of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00296] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, the transmission of a BRP packet 415 of the plurality of BRP packets 415 may include a TxSS 411 of an nth antenna, e.g., n=l...N, of the N antennas of device 102 (Fig. 1) over the TRN field 421 of the BRP packet 415, e.g., as described above.
[00297] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the ITI, receive the plurality BRP packets 415 from the plurality of antennas 107 (Fig. 1) of device 102 (Fig. 1), for example, by receiving, for a BRP packet, e.g., for each BRP packet 415, the preamble 417 and the data field 419 of the BRP packet 415, for example, via the same Rx antenna configuration of the device 140 (Fig. 1), and by operating the m"1 antenna of the plurality of antennas 147 (Fig. 1) at an omnidirectional configuration 423, for example, to receive the one or more TRN subfields 427 of the BRP packet 415, e.g., as described above.
[00298] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to receive the plurality BRP packets 415 over the channel bandwidth in the frequency band above 45 GHz, e.g., as described above.
[00299] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to transmit the feedback 424 to device 140 (Fig. 1), for example, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets 415 from device 140 (Fig. 1) , e.g., as described above. [00300] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, feedback 424 may indicate a selected antenna setting corresponding to the m"1 antenna of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00301] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to repeat the TxSS sub- phase of the beamforming ITI, based on the count of M antennas of the device 140, e.g., as described above.
[00302] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, the TRN subfields 427 of the TRN field 421 in the BRP packet 415 may correspond to a TxSS 411 of an n* antenna of antennas 107 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00303] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to switch from the antenna configuration if the preamble and PSDU to the n* antenna, for example, during a transition interval over the first TRN unit 413 of the BRP packet 415, e.g., as described above.
[00304] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to switch between a plurality of AWVs, e.g., TxSS 411, of the n"1' antenna, for example, during transmission of the TRN units 425 of TRN field 421, e.g., as described above.
[00305] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to transmit the feedback 424 via a same Tx antenna configuration of device 140 (Fig. 1), for example, in each repetition of initiator training procedure 400, e.g., as described above.
[00306] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 4, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1 to receive the feedback 424 via a same Rx antenna configuration of device 102 (Fig. 1), for example, in each repetition of initiator training procedure 400, e.g., as described above.
[00307] Referring back to Fig. 1, in some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations and/or communications of a responder TX training procedure, e.g., as described below. [00308] In one example, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations and/or communications of the responder Tx training procedure, for example, during a responder training interval (RTI) of a TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
[00309] Reference is made to Fig. 5, which schematically illustrates a responder Tx training procedure 500, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[00310] In some demonstrative embodiments, responder Tx training procedure 500 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 502 having N antennas and a responder 540 having M antennas. For example, device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 502, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 540. According to this example, antennas 107 (Fig. 1) may include N antennas, and/or antennas 147 (Fig. 1) may include M antennas.
[00311] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of Fig. 5 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of a TXSS-over-TRN training.
[00312] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of Fig. 6 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of a TXSS-over-TRN RTI training sub-phase, for example, for an n* antenna of initiator 502.
[00313] For example, one or more operations of Fig. 5, may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140, for example, during an n* sub-phase 322 (Fig. 3) of RTI interval 330 (Fig. 3).
[00314] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more of the operations of Fig. 5 may be repeated, for example, for N times, e.g. according to the number of antennas of initiator 502.
[00315] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 5, the responder Tx training procedure 500 may include one or more operations similar to the initiator Tx training procedure 400 (Fig. 4).
[00316] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, the RTI training sub- phase may defer from the ITI sub-phase, for example, in the sense that responder 540 may transmit a plurality of BRP frames 515 to initiator 502, for example, while the initiator 502 is to operate the n* antenna of initiator 502 at an omnidirectional mode 523, and the responder 540 may receive a feedback 524 and/or an ACK from device 502, for example, analogous to initiator training procedure 400 (Fig. 4), in which initiator 402 (Fig. 4) may transmit BRP frames 415 (Fig. 4) to responder 440 (Fig. 4), and receives feedback frame 424 (Fig. 4) from responder 440.
[00317] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, at the end of the TxSS sub phase of a beamforming procedure including initiator Tx training procedure 400 (Fig. 4) and responder Tx training procedure 500, both the initiator and the responder may have full information on the best transmit sectors for PAAs/SAs, and may be able to select the best sectors for transmission to each other.
[00318] In some demonstrative embodiments, responder beamforming procedure 500 may be configured according to a reciprocity assumption, for example, assuming reciprocity between the Tx and Rx antennas of the initiator and responder, e.g., as described below.
[00319] For example, devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1) may be configured to perform one or more operations of a responder training procedure under an antenna reciprocity assumption , e.g., as described below.
[00320] Reference is made to Fig. 6, which schematically illustrates a responder Tx training procedure 600, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[00321] In some demonstrative embodiments, responder training procedure 600 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 602 having N antennas and a responder 640 having M antennas. For example, device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 602, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 640. According to this example, antennas 107 (Fig. 1) may include N antennas, and/or antennas 147 (Fig. 1) may include M antennas.
[00322] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of Fig. 6 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of a TXSS-over-TRN training, e.g., under an assumption of reciprocity.
[00323] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of Fig. 6 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1, for example, as part of a TXSS-over-TRN RTI training sub-phase, for example, for an n* of initiator 602, e.g., under an assumption of sector reciprocity.
[00324] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more of the operations of Fig. 6 may be repeated, for example, for N times according to the number of antennas of initiator 602.
[00325] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 6, the responder training procedure 600 may include one or more operations similar to the responder training procedure 500 (Fig. 5).
[00326] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, according to the responder training procedure 600, the initiator 602 may receive a plurality of BRP frames 615 from the responder 640, for example, while the initiator 602 may use a best sector for the nth antenna of the responder 640, for example, as selected during the ITI training, e.g., as indicated in the feedback 424 (Fig. 4) of the initiator training procedure 400 (Fig. 4), e.g., for the given mth antenna of responder640.
[00327] Referring back to Fig. 1. in some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of an RxSS-over- TRN training procedure, e.g., as described below.
[00328] In some demonstrative embodiments, the RxSS-over-TRN training may optionally follow the TxSS-over-TRN training, for example, if the sector reciprocity assumption is not eligible, and/or for any other reason. In other embodiments, the RxSS-over-TRN training may be partially or fully excluded.
[00329] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations during an RXSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described below.
[00330] In some demonstrative embodiments, RXSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI may include an ITI RxSS and an RTI RxSS, for example, following the ITI RxSS, e.g., as described below.
[00331] In some demonstrative embodiments, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations during the RTI of the RxSS sub-phase e.g., as described below. [00332] Reference is made to Fig. 7, which schematically illustrates a responder Rx training procedure 700, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[00333] In some demonstrative embodiments, responder training procedure 700 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 702 having N antennas and a responder 740 having M antennas. For example, device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 702, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 740. According to this example, antennas 107 (Fig. 1) may include N antennas, and/or antennas 147 (Fig. 1) may include M antennas.
[00334] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of Fig. 7 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of an RXSS-over-TRN training.
[00335] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of Fig. 7 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of an RXSS-over-TRN RTI training sub-phase, for example, for an m"1 antenna of responder 740.
[00336] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more of the operations of Fig. 7 may be repeated, for example, for M times according to the number of antennas of responder 740.
[00337] In some demonstrative embodiments, initiator 702 may send N BRP packets 715, e.g., via the N antennas of initiator 702.
[00338] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 7, a BRP frame 715 may include, for example, a preamble part 717, a PSDU 719, and a TRN field 721.
[00339] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 7, TRN field 721 may include at least one first TRN unit 723 followed by a plurality of TRN units 725.
[00340] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 7, a TRN unit 725 may include a plurality of TRN subfields 727.
[00341] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 7, during the RxSS RTI training, the initiator 702 may transmit the TRN units 725 using a selected, e.g., best, sector between the nth antenna of initiator 702 and the mth antenna of responder 740. [00342] In some demonstrative embodiments, responder 740 may perform a receive sector sweep 712, e.g., over the m"1 antenna of responder 740.
[00343] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 7, responder 740 may send an ACK frame 724, e.g., at the end of responder training procedure 700, for example, to confirm a successful completion of the Rx beamforming training.
[00344] In some demonstrative embodiments, for example, devices 102 and/or 140 may be configured to perform one or more operations of responder training procedure 700, e.g., as described below.
[00345] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1), to transmit the plurality of BRP packets 715 from device 102 (Fig. 1) to device 140, for example, during an RTI of an RxSS sub-phase, e.g., responder Rx training procedure 700.
[00346] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 7, the preamble 717 and the data field 719 of each of the plurality of BRP packets 715 may be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00347] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 7, a TRN field 721 of each of the plurality of BRP packets 715 may be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above. For example, the selected sector may be determined based on the Tx training procedure, e.g., as described above.
[00348] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1 to perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of device 140 (Fig. 1) over TRN field 721 of the BRP packet 715, for example, during an RTI of an RxSS sub-phase, e.g., responder RX training procedure 700.
[00349] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to repeat the RxSS based on the count of antennas, e.g., the N antennas, of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above. [00350] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 7, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to transmit acknowledgement 724 to device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00351] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 7, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to receive the acknowledgement 724 from device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00352] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to switch between a plurality of AWVs of the Rx antenna of device 140 (Fig. 1) during reception of the TRN field 721 of a BRP packet 715 of the plurality of BRP packets 715, e.g., as described above.
[00353] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to repeat the RxSS sub- phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., responder RX training procedure 700, for example, based on a count of the plurality of antennas, e.g., the M antennas, of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00354] In some demonstrative embodiments, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may be configured to control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to repeat the RxSS sub- phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., responder training procedure 700, for example, based on the count of the plurality of antennas, e.g., the M antennas, of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00355] Reference is made to Fig. 8, which schematically illustrates an initiator Rx training procedure 800, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments.
[00356] In some demonstrative embodiments, initiator training procedure 800 may be implemented with respect to an initiator 802 having N antennas and a responder 840 having M antennas. For example, device 102 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of initiator 802, and/or device 140 (Fig. 1) may perform one or more operations and/or functionalities of responder 840. According to this example, antennas 107 (Fig. 1) may include N antennas, and/or antennas 147 (Fig. 1) may include M antennas. [00357] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of Fig. 8 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of an RxSS-over-TRN training.
[00358] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more operations of Fig. 8 may be performed, for example, by devices 102 and/or 140 (Fig. 1), for example, as part of an RxSS-over-TRN ITI training sub-phase, for example, for an n* antenna of initiator 702.
[00359] In some demonstrative embodiments, one or more of the operations of Fig. 8 may be repeated, for example, for N times according to the number of antennas of initiator 702.
[00360] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 8, the initiator training procedure 800 may include one or more operations similar to the responder training procedure 700 (Fig. 7).
[00361] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 8, during the RxSS ITI training, the responder 840 may transmit BRP packets 815 including TRN units 821 using a best sector between an mth antenna of responder 840 and an nth antenna of initiator 802 .
[00362] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 8, the initiator 802 may perform a receive sector sweep 812, e.g., of the nth antenna of initiator 802, for example, over the TRN units 721.
[00363] In some demonstrative embodiments, as shown in Fig. 8, initiator 802 may send an ACK frame 824, e.g., at the end of initiator training procedure 800, for example, to confirm a successful completion of the RX beamforming training.
[00364] In some demonstrative embodiments, after performing Tx training procedures, e.g., the Tx training procedures 400 (Fig. 4), 500 (Fig. 5) and/or 600 (Fig. 6), and the Rx training procedures, e.g., Rx training procedures 700 (Fig. 7) and/or 800 (Fig. 8), both the initiator and the responder may have full information on the best Tx/Rx sectors for PAAs/SAs and can select the best sectors for transmission/reception.
[00365] In some demonstrative embodiments, the beamforming training sub-phases described herein may allow, for example, to complete an SLS training protocol. [00366] Reference is made to Fig. 9, which schematically illustrates a method of beamforming, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments. For example, one or more of the operations of the method of Fig. 9 may be performed by one or more elements of a system, e.g., system 100 (Fig. 1), for example, one or more wireless devices, e.g., device 102 (Fig. 1), and/or device 140 (Fig. 1); a controller, e.g., controller 124 (Fig. 1), and/or controller 154 (Fig. 1); a radio, e.g., radio 114 (Fig. 1), and/or radio 144 (Fig. 1); a transmitter, e.g., transmitter 118 (Fig. 1), and/or transmitter 148 (Fig. 1); a receiver, e.g., receiver 116 (Fig. 1), and/or receiver 146 (Fig. 1); and/or a message processor, e.g., message processor 128 (Fig. 1), and/or message processor 158 (Fig. 1).
[00367] As indicated at block 902, the method may include during a TxSS sub- phase of a beamforming TI, transmitting from a first EDMG STA to a second EDMG STA a plurality of BRP packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA. For example, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets may include a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of the BRP packet. For example, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit the plurality of BRP packets 415 (Fig. 4) to train the plurality of antennas of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above. For example, transmission of a BRP packet 415 (Fig. 4) of the plurality of BRP packets 415 (Fig. 4) may include a TxSS of the antenna of the plurality of antennas of device 102 (Fig. 1) over the TRN field 421 (Fig. 4) of the BRP packet 415 (Fig. 4), e.g., as described above.
[00368] As indicated at block 904, the method may include, during the TxSS sub- phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receiving a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA. For example, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. 1) to receive feedback 424 (Fig. 4) from device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., after the transmission of the plurality of BRP packets 415 (Fig. 4). For example, feedback 424 (Fig. 4) may indicate the selected antenna setting of device 102 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00369] As indicated at block 906, the method may include repeating the TxSS sub- phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA. For example, controller 124 (Fig. 1) may control, cause and/or trigger device 102 (Fig. ) to repeat the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on the count of antennas of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00370] Reference is made to Fig. 10, which schematically illustrates a method of beamforming. For example, one or more of the operations of the method of Fig. 10 may be performed by one or more elements of a system, e.g., system 100 (Fig. 1), for example, one or more wireless devices, e.g., device 102 (Fig. 1), and/or device 140 (Fig. 1); a controller, e.g., controller 124 (Fig. 1), and/or controller 154 (Fig. 1); a radio, e.g., radio 114 (Fig. 1), and/or radio 144 (Fig. 1); a transmitter, e.g., transmitter 118 (Fig. 1), and/or transmitter 148 (Fig. 1); a receiver, e.g., receiver 116 (Fig. 1), and/or receiver 146 (Fig. 1); and/or a message processor, e.g., message processor 128 (Fig. 1), and/or message processor 158 (Fig. 1).
[00371] As indicated at block 1002, the method may include during a TxSS sub- phase of a beamforming TI, receiving at a first EDMG STA a plurality of BRP packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA. For example, receiving plurality of BRP packets may include receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Rx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more TRN subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet. For example, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to receive the plurality of BRP packets 415 (Fig. 4) from the plurality of antennas of device 102 (Fig. 1), for example, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, e.g., as described above. For example, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to receive, e.g., for each BRP packet 415 (Fig. 4) of the plurality of packets 415 (Fig. 4), a preamble 417 (Fig. 4) and a data field 419 (Fig. 4) of the BRP packet 415 (Fig. 4) via the Rx antenna configuration of device 140 (Fig. 1), and to operate the n* antenna at the omnidirectional mode 423 (Fig. 4) to receive the one or more TRN subfields 427 (Fig. 4) in the TRN field 421 (Fig. 4) of the BRP packet 415 (Fig. 4), e.g., as described above.
[00372] As indicated at block 1004, the method may include during the TxSS sub- phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmitting a feedback to the second EDMG STA. For example, the feedback to the second EDMG STA may indicate a selected antenna setting of the second EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the first EDMG STA. For example, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to transmit feedback 242 (Fig. 4) to device 102 (Fig. 1) to indicate a selected antenna setting of device 102 (fig. 1) corresponding to the antenna m"1 of device 140 (Fig. 1), for example, ), subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, 415 (Fig. 4), e.g., as described above.
[00373] As indicated at block 1006, the method may include, repeating the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, for example, based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA. For example, controller 154 (Fig. 1) may control, cause and/or trigger device 140 (Fig. 1) to repeat the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of device 140 (Fig. 1), e.g., as described above.
[00374] Reference is made to Fig. 11 , which schematically illustrates a product of manufacture 1100, in accordance with some demonstrative embodiments. Product 1100 may include one or more tangible computer-readable ("machine-readable") non- transitory storage media 1102, which may include computer-executable instructions, e.g., implemented by logic 1104, operable to, when executed by at least one computer processor, enable the at least one computer processor to implement one or more operations at device 102 (Fig. 1), device 140 (Fig. 1), radio 114 (Fig. 1), radio 144 (Fig. 1), transmitter 118 (Fig. 1), transmitter 148 (Fig. 1), receiver 116 (Fig. 1), 1), receiver 146 (Fig. 1), controller 124 (Fig. 1), controller 154 (Fig. 1), message processor 128 (Fig. 1), and/or message processor 158 (Fig. 1), to cause device 102 (Fig. 1), device 140 (Fig. 1), radio 114 (Fig. 1), radio 144 (Fig. 1), transmitter 118 (Fig. 1), transmitter 148 (Fig. 1), receiver 116 (Fig. 1), 1), receiver 146 (Fig. 1), controller 124 (Fig. 1), controller 154 (Fig. 1), message processor 128 (Fig. 1), and/or message processor 158 (Fig. 1) to perform one or more operations, and/or to perform, trigger and/or implement one or more operations, communications and/or functionalities described above with reference to Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and/or 10, and/or one or more operations described herein. The phrase "non-transitory machine -readable medium" is directed to include all computer-readable media, with the sole exception being a transitory propagating signal. [00375] In some demonstrative embodiments, product 1100 and/or storage media 1102 may include one or more types of computer-readable storage media capable of storing data, including volatile memory, non-volatile memory, removable or nonremovable memory, erasable or non-erasable memory, writeable or re-writeable memory, and the like. For example, machine-readable storage media 702 may include, RAM, DRAM, Double-Data-Rate DRAM (DDR-DRAM), SDRAM, static RAM (SRAM), ROM, programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM), Compact Disk ROM (CD-ROM), Compact Disk Recordable (CD-R), Compact Disk Rewriteable (CD-RW), flash memory (e.g., NOR or NAND flash memory), content addressable memory (CAM), polymer memory, phase-change memory, ferroelectric memory, silicon-oxide-nitride-oxide-silicon (SONOS) memory, a disk, a floppy disk, a hard drive, an optical disk, a magnetic disk, a card, a magnetic card, an optical card, a tape, a cassette, and the like. The computer-readable storage media may include any suitable media involved with downloading or transferring a computer program from a remote computer to a requesting computer carried by data signals embodied in a carrier wave or other propagation medium through a communication link, e.g., a modem, radio or network connection.
[00376] In some demonstrative embodiments, logic 1104 may include instructions, data, and/or code, which, if executed by a machine, may cause the machine to perform a method, process and/or operations as described herein. The machine may include, for example, any suitable processing platform, computing platform, computing device, processing device, computing system, processing system, computer, processor, or the like, and may be implemented using any suitable combination of hardware, software, firmware, and the like.
[00377] In some demonstrative embodiments, logic 1104 may include, or may be implemented as, software, firmware, a software module, an application, a program, a subroutine, instructions, an instruction set, computing code, words, values, symbols, and the like. The instructions may include any suitable type of code, such as source code, compiled code, interpreted code, executable code, static code, dynamic code, and the like. The instructions may be implemented according to a predefined computer language, manner or syntax, for instructing a processor to perform a certain function. The instructions may be implemented using any suitable high-level, low- level, object-oriented, visual, compiled and/or interpreted programming language, such as C, C++, Java, BASIC, Matlab, Pascal, Visual BASIC, assembly language, machine code, and the like.
EXAMPLES
[00378] The following examples pertain to further embodiments.
[00379] Example 1 includes an apparatus comprising logic and circuitry configured to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmit to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receive a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and repeat the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00380] Example 2 includes the subject matter of Example 1, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00381] Example 3 includes the subject matter of Example 1 or 2, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to begin the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
[00382] Example 4 includes the subject matter of Example 3, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
[00383] Example 5 includes the subject matter of Example 3 or 4, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit. [00384] Example 6 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-5, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
[00385] Example 7 includes the subject matter of Example 6, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field.
[00386] Example 8 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-7, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00387] Example 9 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-8, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to perform a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets.
[00388] Example 10 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-9, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA; repeat the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and transmit an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
[00389] Example 11 includes the subject matter of Example 10, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
[00390] Example 12 includes the subject matter of Example 11, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA. [00391] Example 13 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 10-12, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
[00392] Example 14 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-13, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
[00393] Example 15 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-13, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
[00394] Example 16 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-15, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter- Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
[00395] Example 17 includes the subject matter of Example 16, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
[00396] Example 18 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-17, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
[00397] Example 19 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-18, and optionally, comprising a radio to transmit the plurality of BRP packets.
[00398] Example 20 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 1-19, and optionally, comprising the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, a memory, and a processor.
[00399] Example 21 includes a system of wireless communication comprising a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the first EDMG STA comprising a plurality of antennas; a radio; a memory; a processor; and a controller configured to cause the first EDMG STA to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmit to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receive a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and repeat the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00400] Example 22 includes the subject matter of Example 21, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00401] Example 23 includes the subject matter of Example 21 or 22, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to begin the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
[00402] Example 24 includes the subject matter of Example 23, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
[00403] Example 25 includes the subject matter of Example 23 or 24, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
[00404] Example 26 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-25, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
[00405] Example 27 includes the subject matter of Example 26, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field. [00406] Example 28 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-27, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00407] Example 29 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-28, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to perform a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets.
[00408] Example 30 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-29, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA; repeat the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and transmit an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
[00409] Example 31 includes the subject matter of Example 30, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
[00410] Example 32 includes the subject matter of Example 31, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
[00411] Example 33 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 30-32, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
[00412] Example 34 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-33, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA. [00413] Example 35 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-33, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
[00414] Example 36 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-35, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
[00415] Example 37 includes the subject matter of Example 36, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
[00416] Example 38 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 21-37, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
[00417] Example 39 includes a method to be performed at a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the method comprising during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmitting to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receiving a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and repeating the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00418] Example 40 includes the subject matter of Example 39, and optionally, comprising transmitting a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00419] Example 41 includes the subject matter of Example 39 or 40, and optionally, comprising beginning the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field. [00420] Example 42 includes the subject matter of Example 41, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
[00421] Example 43 includes the subject matter of Example 41 or 42, and optionally, comprising switching to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
[00422] Example 44 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-43, and optionally, comprising switching between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
[00423] Example 45 includes the subject matter of Example 44, and optionally, comprising switching between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field.
[00424] Example 46 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-45, and optionally, comprising, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receiving the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00425] Example 47 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-46, and optionally, comprising performing a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets.
[00426] Example 48 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-47, and optionally, comprising, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI performing an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA; repeating the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and transmitting an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
[00427] Example 49 includes the subject matter of Example 48, and optionally, comprising switching between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA. [00428] Example 50 includes the subject matter of Example 49, and optionally, comprising switching between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
[00429] Example 51 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 48-50, and optionally, comprising repeating the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
[00430] Example 52 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-51, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
[00431] Example 53 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-51, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
[00432] Example 54 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-53, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
[00433] Example 55 includes the subject matter of Example 54, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
[00434] Example 56 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 39-55, and optionally, comprising transmitting the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
[00435] Example 57 includes a product comprising one or more tangible computer- readable non-transitory storage media comprising computer-executable instructions operable to, when executed by at least one processor, enable the at least one processor to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmit to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receive a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and repeat the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00436] Example 58 includes the subject matter of Example 57, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to transmit a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00437] Example 59 includes the subject matter of Example 57 or 58, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to begin the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
[00438] Example 60 includes the subject matter of Example 59, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
[00439] Example 61 includes the subject matter of Example 59 or 60, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
[00440] Example 62 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-61, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
[00441] Example 63 includes the subject matter of Example 62, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field.
[00442] Example 64 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-63, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA. [00443] Example 65 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-64, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to perform a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets.
[00444] Example 66 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-65, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA; repeat the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and transmit an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
[00445] Example 67 includes the subject matter of Example 66, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
[00446] Example 68 includes the subject matter of Example 67, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
[00447] Example 69 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 66-68, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
[00448] Example 70 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-69, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
[00449] Example 71 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-69, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
[00450] Example 72 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-71, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
[00451] Example 73 includes the subject matter of Example 72, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
[00452] Example 74 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 57-73, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
[00453] Example 75 includes an apparatus of wireless communication by a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the apparatus comprising means for, during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmitting to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet; means for, during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receiving a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and means for repeating the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00454] Example 76 includes the subject matter of Example 75, and optionally, comprising means for transmitting a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00455] Example 77 includes the subject matter of Example 75 or 76, and optionally, comprising means for beginning the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
[00456] Example 78 includes the subject matter of Example 77, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field. [00457] Example 79 includes the subject matter of Example 77 or 78, and optionally, comprising means for switching to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
[00458] Example 80 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-79, and optionally, comprising means for switching between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
[00459] Example 81 includes the subject matter of Example 80, and optionally, comprising means for switching between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field.
[00460] Example 82 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-81, and optionally, comprising means for, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receiving the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00461] Example 83 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-82, and optionally, comprising means for performing a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets.
[00462] Example 84 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-83, and optionally, comprising means for, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub- phase of the beamforming TI performing an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA; repeating the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and transmitting an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
[00463] Example 85 includes the subject matter of Example 84, and optionally, comprising means for switching between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
[00464] Example 86 includes the subject matter of Example 85, and optionally, comprising means for switching between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA. [00465] Example 87 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 84-86, and optionally, comprising means for repeating the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
[00466] Example 88 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-87, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
[00467] Example 89 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-87, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
[00468] Example 90 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-89, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
[00469] Example 91 includes the subject matter of Example 90, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
[00470] Example 92 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 75-91, and optionally, comprising means for transmitting the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
[00471] Example 93 includes an apparatus comprising logic and circuitry configured to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receive a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmit a feedback to the second EDMG STA, the feedback to the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the second EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the first EDMG STA; and based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, repeat the TxSS sub- phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
[00472] Example 94 includes the subject matter of Example 93, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields of the TRN field correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00473] Example 95 includes the subject matter of Example 94, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
[00474] Example 96 includes the subject matter of Example 95, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
[00475] Example 97 includes the subject matter of Example 95 or 96, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the first EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
[00476] Example 98 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-97, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00477] Example 99 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-98, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI transmit a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and receive an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
[00478] Example 100 includes the subject matter of Example 99, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00479] Example 101 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-100, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
[00480] Example 102 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-100, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
[00481] Example 103 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-102, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter- Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
[00482] Example 104 includes the subject matter of Example 103, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
[00483] Example 105 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-104, and optionally, wherein the apparatus is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to receive the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
[00484] Example 106 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-105, and optionally, comprising a radio to receive the plurality of BRP packets.
[00485] Example 107 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 93-106, and optionally, comprising the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, a memory, and a processor.
[00486] Example 108 includes a system of wireless communication comprising a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the first EDMG STA comprising a plurality of antennas; a radio; a memory; a processor; and a controller configured to cause the first EDMG STA to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receive a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmit a feedback to the second EDMG STA, the feedback to the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the second EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the first EDMG STA; and based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, repeat the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
[00487] Example 109 includes the subject matter of Example 108, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields of the TRN field correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00488] Example 110 includes the subject matter of Example 109, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
[00489] Example 111 includes the subject matter of Example 110, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
[00490] Example 112 includes the subject matter of Example 110 or 111, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the first EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
[00491] Example 113 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-112, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00492] Example 114 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-113, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI transmit a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and receive an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
[00493] Example 115 includes the subject matter of Example 114, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00494] Example 116 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-115, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
[00495] Example 117 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-115, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
[00496] Example 118 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-117, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter- Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
[00497] Example 119 includes the subject matter of Example 118, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
[00498] Example 120 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 108-119, and optionally, wherein the controller is configured to cause the first EDMG STA to receive the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
[00499] Example 121 includes a method to be performed at a first Enhanced Directional Multi- Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the method comprising during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receiving a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmitting a feedback to the second EDMG STA, the feedback to the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the second EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the first EDMG STA; and based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, repeating the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
[00500] Example 122 includes the subject matter of Example 121, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields of the TRN field correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00501] Example 123 includes the subject matter of Example 122, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
[00502] Example 124 includes the subject matter of Example 123, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
[00503] Example 125 includes the subject matter of Example 123 or 124, and optionally, comprising switching to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the first EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
[00504] Example 126 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-125, and optionally, comprising, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmitting the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00505] Example 127 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-126, and optionally, comprising, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI transmitting a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and receiving an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
[00506] Example 128 includes the subject matter of Example 127, and optionally, comprising repeating the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00507] Example 129 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-128, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
[00508] Example 130 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-128, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
[00509] Example 131 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-130, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter- Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
[00510] Example 132 includes the subject matter of Example 131, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS. [00511] Example 133 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 121-132, and optionally, comprising receiving the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
[00512] Example 134 includes a product comprising one or more tangible computer-readable non-transitory storage media comprising computer-executable instructions operable to, when executed by at least one processor, enable the at least one processor to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receive a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet; during the TxSS sub-phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmit a feedback to the second EDMG STA, the feedback to the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the second EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the first EDMG STA; and based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, repeat the TxSS sub- phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
[00513] Example 135 includes the subject matter of Example 134, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields of the TRN field correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00514] Example 136 includes the subject matter of Example 135, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
[00515] Example 137 includes the subject matter of Example 136, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
[00516] Example 138 includes the subject matter of Example 136 or 137, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the first EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
[00517] Example 139 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-138, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmit the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00518] Example 140 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-139, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI transmit a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and receive an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
[00519] Example 141 includes the subject matter of Example 140, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00520] Example 142 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-141, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
[00521] Example 143 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-141, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
[00522] Example 144 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-143, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter-Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
[00523] Example 145 includes the subject matter of Example 144, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
[00524] Example 146 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 134-145, and optionally, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to receive the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
[00525] Example 147 includes an apparatus of wireless communication by a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the apparatus comprising means for, during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receiving a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet; means for, during the TxSS sub-phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmitting a feedback to the second EDMG STA, the feedback to the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the second EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the first EDMG STA; and means for, based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, repeating the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
[00526] Example 148 includes the subject matter of Example 147, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields of the TRN field correspond to a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00527] Example 149 includes the subject matter of Example 148, and optionally, wherein the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field. [00528] Example 150 includes the subject matter of Example 149, and optionally, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TRN subfields corresponding to the TxSS of the antenna of the second EDMG STA comprise TRN subfields beginning at a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
[00529] Example 151 includes the subject matter of Example 149 or 150, and optionally, comprising means for switching to the omnidirectional configuration of the antenna of the first EDMG STA during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
[00530] Example 152 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-151, and optionally, comprising means for, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, transmitting the feedback via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
[00531] Example 153 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-152, and optionally, comprising means for, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI transmitting a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and receiving an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
[00532] Example 154 includes the subject matter of Example 153, and optionally, comprising means for repeating the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
[00533] Example 155 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-154, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
[00534] Example 156 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-154, and optionally, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA. [00535] Example 157 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-156, and optionally, wherein the plurality of BRP packets comprises a sequence of BRP packets separated from one another by a first Inter- Frame-Space (IFS), the feedback separated from the plurality of BRP packets by a second IFS.
[00536] Example 158 includes the subject matter of Example 157, and optionally, wherein repetitions of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI are separated from one another by a third IFS.
[00537] Example 159 includes the subject matter of any one of Examples 147-158, and optionally, comprising means for receiving the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
[00538] Functions, operations, components and/or features described herein with reference to one or more embodiments, may be combined with, or may be utilized in combination with, one or more other functions, operations, components and/or features described herein with reference to one or more other embodiments, or vice versa.
[00539] While certain features have been illustrated and described herein, many modifications, substitutions, changes, and equivalents may occur to those skilled in the art. It is, therefore, to be understood that the appended claims are intended to cover all such modifications and changes as fall within the true spirit of the disclosure.

Claims

What is claimed is: 1. An apparatus comprising logic and circuitry configured to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to:
during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmit to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet;
during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receive a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and
repeat the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
2. The apparatus of claim 1 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
3. The apparatus of claim 1 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to begin the TxSS of the antenna only after at least one first TRN unit, which is first in order in the TRN field.
4. The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the at least one first TRN unit comprises a single TRN unit, the TxSS of the antenna to begin over a second TRN unit, which is second in order in the TRN field.
5. The apparatus of claim 3 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch to the antenna during a transition interval over the at least one first TRN unit.
6. The apparatus of claim 1 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the antenna during transmission of the TRN field.
7. The apparatus of claim 6 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the antenna and a second AWV of the antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field.
8. The apparatus of claim 1 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, in each repetition of the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, receive the feedback via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA.
9. The apparatus of claim 1 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to perform a TxSS of each antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a respective BRP packet of said plurality of BRP packets.
10. The apparatus of claim 1 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI:
perform an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA;
repeat the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and
transmit an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
11. The apparatus of claim 10 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a plurality of Antenna Weight Vectors (AWVs) of the Rx antenna during reception of the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
12. The apparatus of claim 11 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to switch between a first AWV of the Rx antenna and a second AWV of the Rx antenna during one or more TRN subfields of a TRN unit in the TRN field of the BRP packet from the second EDMG STA.
13. The apparatus of claim 10 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to repeat the RxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
14. The apparatus of any one of claims 1-13, wherein the beamforming TI comprises an Initiator TI (ITI), the first EDMG STA comprising an initiator STA.
15. The apparatus of any one of claims 1-13, wherein the beamforming TI comprises a Responder TI (RTI), the first EDMG STA comprising a responder STA.
16. The apparatus of any one of claims 1-13 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to transmit the plurality of BRP packets over a channel bandwidth in a frequency band above 45 Gigahertz (GHz).
17. The apparatus of any one of claims 1-13 comprising the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, a memory, and a processor.
18. A method to be performed at a first Enhanced Directional Multi- Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA), the method comprising:
during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), transmitting to a second EDMG STA a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets to train a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, transmission of a BRP packet of the plurality of BRP packets comprising a TxSS of an antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA over a Training (TRN) field of the BRP packet;
during the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI, after transmission of the plurality of BRP packets, receiving a feedback from the second EDMG STA, the feedback from the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the first EDMG STA; and
repeating the TxSS sub-phase of the beamforming TI based on a count of antennas of the second EDMG STA.
19. The method of claim 18 comprising, during a Receive (Rx) Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI:
performing an RxSS of an Rx antenna of the first EDMG STA over a TRN field of a BRP packet from the second EDMG STA;
repeating the RxSS based on the count of antennas of the second EDMG STA; and
transmitting an acknowledgement to the second EDMG STA.
20. A product comprising one or more tangible computer-readable non-transitory storage media comprising computer-executable instructions operable to, when executed by at least one processor, enable the at least one processor to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to perform the method of claim 18 or 19.
21. An apparatus comprising logic and circuitry configured to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to:
during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receive a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet;
during the TxSS sub-phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmit a feedback to the second EDMG STA, the feedback to the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the second EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the first EDMG STA; and
based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, repeat the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
22. The apparatus of claim 21 configured to cause the first EDMG STA to, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI:
transmit a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second
EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and
receive an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
23. The apparatus of claim 21 or 22 comprising the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, a memory, and a processor.
24. A product comprising one or more tangible computer-readable non-transitory storage media comprising computer-executable instructions operable to, when executed by at least one processor, enable the at least one processor to cause a first Enhanced Directional Multi-Gigabit (EDMG) station (STA) to:
during a Transmit (Tx) Sector Sweep (TxSS) sub-phase of a beamforming Training Interval (TI), receive a plurality of Beam Refinement Protocol (BRP) packets from a plurality of antennas of a second EDMG STA by receiving, for each BRP packet of the plurality of packets, a preamble and a data field of the BRP packet via a same Receive (Rx) antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, and by operating an antenna of a plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA at an omnidirectional configuration to receive one or more Training (TRN) subfields in a TRN field of the BRP packet;
during the TxSS sub-phase, subsequent to reception of the plurality of BRP packets, transmit a feedback to the second EDMG STA, the feedback to the second EDMG STA to indicate a selected antenna setting of the second EDMG STA corresponding to the antenna of the first EDMG STA; and
based on a count of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA, repeat the TxSS sub-phase for one or more other respective antennas of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA.
25. The product of claim 24, wherein the instructions, when executed, cause the first EDMG STA to, during an Rx Sector Sweep (RxSS) sub-phase of the beamforming TI:
transmit a plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA to the second
EDMG STA, a preamble and a data field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA are to be transmitted via a same Tx antenna configuration of the first EDMG STA, a TRN field of each of the plurality of BRP packets from the first EDMG STA is to be transmitted from a selected sector of a respective antenna of the plurality of antennas of the first EDMG STA; and
receive an acknowledgement from the second EDMG STA.
PCT/US2017/039927 2016-12-22 2017-06-29 Apparatus, system and method of beamforming WO2018118118A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201662437887P 2016-12-22 2016-12-22
US62/437,887 2016-12-22

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018118118A1 true WO2018118118A1 (en) 2018-06-28

Family

ID=62627053

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2017/039927 WO2018118118A1 (en) 2016-12-22 2017-06-29 Apparatus, system and method of beamforming

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018118118A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11362720B2 (en) 2017-06-23 2022-06-14 Intel Corporation Apparatus, system and method of beam refinement protocol (BRP) transmit (TX) sector sweep (SS) (TXSS)
US11368204B2 (en) 2017-06-23 2022-06-21 Intel Corporation Apparatus, system and method of beam refinement protocol (BRP) transmit (TX) sector sweep (SS) (TXSS)
WO2024144147A1 (en) * 2022-12-27 2024-07-04 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and device for transmitting or receiving training information in wireless lan system

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2582068A2 (en) * 2011-10-11 2013-04-17 Broadcom Corporation Beamforming training within a wireless communication system utilizing a directional antenna
US20150103756A1 (en) * 2013-10-14 2015-04-16 Broadcom Corporation Efficient Beacon Transmission and Reception
US20160087695A1 (en) * 2012-05-22 2016-03-24 Mediatek Singapore Pte. Ltd. Method and Apparatus of Beam Training for MIMO Operation and Multiple Antenna Beamforming Operation

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2582068A2 (en) * 2011-10-11 2013-04-17 Broadcom Corporation Beamforming training within a wireless communication system utilizing a directional antenna
US20160087695A1 (en) * 2012-05-22 2016-03-24 Mediatek Singapore Pte. Ltd. Method and Apparatus of Beam Training for MIMO Operation and Multiple Antenna Beamforming Operation
US20150103756A1 (en) * 2013-10-14 2015-04-16 Broadcom Corporation Efficient Beacon Transmission and Reception

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"DMG low- power SC A-PPDU and other MAC fixes", I EEE 802.11-15/1272R01, 14 March 2016 (2016-03-14) *
KOME OTERI ET AL.: "Further Details on Multi-Stage, Multi- Resolution Beamforming Training in 802.11ayv", IEEE 802.11-16/1447RL, 7 November 2016 (2016-11-07) *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11362720B2 (en) 2017-06-23 2022-06-14 Intel Corporation Apparatus, system and method of beam refinement protocol (BRP) transmit (TX) sector sweep (SS) (TXSS)
US11368204B2 (en) 2017-06-23 2022-06-21 Intel Corporation Apparatus, system and method of beam refinement protocol (BRP) transmit (TX) sector sweep (SS) (TXSS)
WO2024144147A1 (en) * 2022-12-27 2024-07-04 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and device for transmitting or receiving training information in wireless lan system

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3289697B1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of beamforming
US11445520B2 (en) Apparatus, system and method of beamforming and beam tracking
US11552685B2 (en) Apparatus, system and method of asymmetric beamforming training
US10931417B2 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communicating a transmission according to a symbol block structure and guard interval (GI) scheme
US20210168865A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communication based on clear channel assessment (cca) in one or more directions
WO2023121827A1 (en) Apparatus, system, and method of a transmit sector sweep (txss) procedure over a millimeterwave (mmwave) wireless communication channel
EP3403338B1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communicating a multiple-input-multiple-output (mimo) transmission
WO2017119974A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communicating an enhanced directional multi gigabit (edmg) support indication
EP3329607A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of single-user (su) multi-in-multi-out (mimo) communication
WO2018044354A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communicating an enhanced directional multi-gigabit (edmg) physical layer protocol data unit (ppdu)
US11368204B2 (en) Apparatus, system and method of beam refinement protocol (BRP) transmit (TX) sector sweep (SS) (TXSS)
US10651908B2 (en) Apparatus, system and method of beamforming
WO2017192236A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communicating a mimo transmission with golay sequence set
WO2019014041A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of asymmetric beamforming training
WO2018118118A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of beamforming
US11362720B2 (en) Apparatus, system and method of beam refinement protocol (BRP) transmit (TX) sector sweep (SS) (TXSS)
WO2019005747A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communicating an enhanced directional multi-gigabit (dmg) (edmg) orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (ofdm) physical layer (phy) protocol data unit (ppdu)
WO2018071057A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communicating a beam refinement protocol (brp) frame
WO2018080608A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communicating an enhanced directional multi-gigabit (edmg) physical layer protocol data unit (ppdu) with a training field over a plurality of spatial streams
WO2018226553A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communicating a physical layer protocol data unit (ppdu)
WO2018128642A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of modifying a channel bandwidth during a transmit opportunity (txop)
EP4454192A1 (en) Apparatus, system, and method of a transmit sector sweep (txss) procedure over a millimeterwave (mmwave) wireless communication channel
WO2024005809A1 (en) Apparatus, system, and method of communicating a packet with a training (trn) field
WO2018132127A1 (en) Apparatus, system and method of communicating an edmg ppdu with a spoofed length

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17882619

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17882619

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1